5 Data carriers

5.1 Introduction

A data carrier is a means of representing data in machine readable form. Barcode symbologies that are endorsed by GS1 are described in sections 5.2 to 5.11; AIDC data carrier production and quality assessment are covered in section 5.12. EPC/RFID is described in section 5.13. NFC is described in section 5.14.

The GS1 system specifies the data carrier used to represent any given element string. Section 2 covers rules indicating which data carrier should be used to represent which element strings in particular applications.

5.1.1 Overview of GS1 barcodes

The GS1 system uses the following data carriers: The EAN/UPC symbology family of barcodes (UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN-13 and EAN-8 barcodes and

the two- and five-digit add-on symbols) can be read omnidirectionally. These symbols must be used for all items that are scanned at the point-of-sale and may be used on other trade items. UPC-A EAN-13

Figure 5-1 UPC-A and EAN-13 barcodes

ITF-14 (Interleaved 2-of-5) barcodes carry ID numbers only on trade items that are not

expected to pass through the point-of-sale. ITF-14 symbols are better suited for direct printing onto corrugated fibreboard.

Figure 5-2 ITF-14 barcode

The GS1-128 barcode is a subset of the Code 128 barcode symbology. Its use is exclusively

licenced to GS1. This extremely flexible symbology encodes element strings using GS1

Application Identifiers.

Figure 5-3 GS1-128 barcode

GS1 DataBar is a family of linear symbologies used within the GS1 system. This family of linear

symbologies in most cases implicitly encodes GS1 Application Identifier (01) and in the case of GS1 DataBar Expanded explicitly encodes element strings using GS1 Application Identifiers.

Figure 5-4 GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional barcode

Composite Component symbols do not exist in isolation. The primary identification number is

always encoded in the linear symbol and supplementary GS1 Application Identifier element strings are encoded in the two-dimensional (2D) component where they take up less space. (17)050101(10)ABC123 (01)04012345678901

Figure 5-5 GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional barcode with a Composite Component GS1 DataMatrix implementing ECC 200 error correction is a subset of ISO/IEC 16022 and is the

only version that supports GS1 system data structures encoded with GS1 element string syntax, including Function 1 Symbol Character (FNC1). GS1 DataMatrix SHALL be implemented per approved GS1 system application standards, such as those for regulated healthcare retail consumer trade items.

Figure 5-6 GS1 DataMatrix barcode

GS1 QR Code, is a subset of ISO/IEC 18004. QR Code supports GS1 system data structures

encoding with GS1 element string syntax, including Function 1 Symbol Character (FNC1). GS1

QR Code SHALL be implemented per approved GS1 system application standards.

Figure 5-7 GS1 QR Code barcode

GS1 DotCode, supporting GS1 system data structures is supported by the AIM DotCode

Specification, Rev 3.0, August 2014. Per the specification, “Message segments that begin with a pair of digits, without an FNC1 either before or immediately following those two digits are regarded as conveying GS1 formatted data by excluding Function 1 Symbol Character.” GS1 DotCode SHALL be implemented per approved GS1 system application standards.

Figure 5-8 GS1 DotCode barcode

Data Matrix implementing ECC 200 error correction is an International Standard ISO/IEC 16022.

Data Matrix Code supports GS1 system data structures encoded with GS1 Digital Link URI syntax. Data Matrix SHALL be implemented per approved GS1 system application standards. https://example.com/01/09506000134369

Figure 5-9. Data Matrix barcode

QR Code is an International Standard ISO/IEC 18004. QR Code supports GS1 system data structures encoded with GS1 Digital Link URI syntax. QR Code SHALL be implemented per approved GS1 system application standards. https://example.com/01/09506000134369

Figure 5-10. QR Code barcode

5.1.2 International data carrier standards

A number of national and regional standardisation bodies have developed barcode technical standards. The International Organisation for Standardisation (ISO) has published standard barcode symbology specifications via a subcommittee of ISO/IEC JTC1 (International Organisation for Standardisation/International Electrotechnical Commission Joint Technical Committee 1).

GS1 is actively involved in developing these standards. The objective is for GS1 system standards to remain fully compatible with relevant published national, regional and international symbology standards. The pertinent documents for section 5 include the latest published version of:

Section 5.1: ISO/IEC 15424: Information technology; automatic identification and data capture

techniques; data carrier/symbology identifiers.

Section 5.2: ISO/IEC 15420: Information technology; automatic identification and data capture

techniques; bar code symbology specifications; EAN/UPC.

Section 5.3: ISO/IEC 16390: Information technology; automatic identification and data capture

techniques; bar code symbology specifications; ITF-14.

Section 5.4: ISO/IEC 15417: Information technology; automatic identification and data capture

techniques; bar code symbology specifications; GS1-128 Symbology specifications.

Section 5.5: ISO/IEC 24724: Information technology; automatic identification and data capture

techniques; GS1 DataBar bar code symbology specification.

Section 5.6: ISO/IEC 16022: Information technology; automatic identification and data capture

techniques; Data Matrix bar code symbology specification, as it pertains to GS1 DataMatrix.

Section 5.7: ISO/IEC 18004:2015: Information technology; automatic identification and data

capture techniques; QR Code bar code symbology specification, as it pertains to GS1 QR Code.

Section 5.8: AIM Rev 3.0, August 2014: Information technology; automatic identification and

data capture techniques; bar code symbology specification - DotCode.

Section 5.9: ISO/IEC 16022: Information technology; automatic identification and data capture

techniques; Data Matrix bar code symbology specification.

Section 5.10: ISO/IEC 18004: Information technology; automatic identification and data

capture techniques; QR Code bar code symbology specification

Section 5.11: ISO/IEC 24723: Information technology; automatic identification and data

capture techniques; EAN.UCC Composite bar code symbology specification.

Section 5.12: AIDC data carrier production and quality assessment:

ISO/IEC 15415: Information technology; automatic identification and data capture
techniques; bar code print quality test specification; two-dimensional symbols.

ISO/IEC 15416: Information technology; automatic identification and data capture

techniques; bar code print quality test specification; linear symbols.

ISO/IEC 15419: Information technology; automatic identification and data capture

techniques; bar code digital imaging and printing performance testing.

ISO/IEC 15421: Information technology; automatic identification and data capture

techniques; bar code master test specifications.

ISO/IEC 15426-1: Information technology; automatic identification and data capture

techniques; bar code verifier conformance specification - Part 1: Linear symbols.

ISO/IEC 15426-2: Information technology; automatic identification and data capture

techniques; bar code verifier conformance specification - Part 2: Two-dimensional symbols.

ISO 1073-2: Alphanumeric character sets for optical recognition – Part 2: Character set

OCR-B Shapes and dimensions of the printed image.

ISO/IEC 29158: Information technology; Automatic identification and data capture

techniques; direct part marking (DPM) Quality Guideline.

ISO/IEC 18047-3: Information technology — Radio frequency identification device

conformance test methods, Part 3: Test methods for air interface communications at 13,56

MHz ISO/IEC 18047-63: Information technology — Radio frequency identification device

conformance test methods, Part 63: Test methods for air interface communications at 860

MHz to 930 MHz ISO/IEC 18046-1: Information technology — Radio frequency identification device

performance test methods, Part 1: Test methods for system performance

ISO/IEC 18046-2: Information technology — Radio frequency identification device

performance test methods, Part 2: Test methods for interrogator performance

ISO/IEC 18046-3: Information technology — Radio frequency identification device

performance test methods, Part 3: Test methods for tag performance

□ NFC Forum: Devices Requirements — High Level Conformance Requirements Section 5.13: UHF and HF EPC/RFID:

ISO/IEC 18000-63 Information technology — Radio frequency identification for item
management — Part 63: Parameters for air interface communications at 860 MHz to 960

MHz Type C ISO/IEC 18000-3 Information technology — Radio frequency identification for item

management — Part 3: Parameters for air interface communications at 13,56 MHz

Section 5.14: NFC:

NFC Forum NFC Data Exchange Format Technical Specification
NFC Forum URI Record Type Definition Technical Specification
NFC Forum Analog Technical Specification
NFC Forum Digital Technical Specification
All sections: ISO/IEC 646: Information technology; ISO 7-bit coded character set for
information interchange.

5.1.3 Symbology identifiers

The symbology identifier is not encoded in the barcode but is generated by the decoder after decoding and is transmitted as a preamble to the data message. All scanning equipment has the ability to recognise the symbology that has been scanned. Some scanners have the optional feature of being able to transmit a symbology identifier. The symbology identifier is a three-character data string comprising a flag character, code character and a modifier character. The symbology identifiers used in the GS1 system are shown in Table 5-2.

Table 5-1 Structure of the symbology identifiers

Character	Description
]	The flag character (which has an ASCII value of 93). This denotes that the two characters following it are Symbol Identifier characters.
c	The code character. This denotes the type of symbology.
m	The modifier character. This indicates the mode in which the symbology is used.

Note: If used, the symbology identifier is transmitted as a prefix to the data message.

Table 5-2 ISO/IEC 15424 symbology identifiers used in the GS1 system

Symbology identifier (*)	Symbology format	Content
]E0	EAN-13, UPC-A, or UPC-E	13 digits
]E1	Two-digit add-on symbol	2 digits
]E2	Five-digit add-on symbol	5 digits
]E3	EAN-13, UPC-A, or UPC-E with add-on symbol (**)	15 or 18 digits
]E4	EAN-8	8 digits
]I1	ITF-14	14 digits
]C1	GS1-128	Standard AI element strings
]e0	GS1 DataBar	Standard AI element strings
]e1	GS1 Composite	Data packet containing the data following an encoded symbol separator character.
]e2	GS1 Composite	Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism character.
]d2	GS1 DataMatrix	Standard AI element strings
]Q3	GS1 QR Code	Standard AI element strings
]J1	GS1 DotCode	Standard AI element strings
]d1	Data Matrix implementing ECC 200	GS1 Digital Link URI
]Q1	QR Code	GS1 Digital Link URI

(*) Symbology identifiers are case sensitive. (**) Barcodes with add-on symbols may be considered either as two separate symbols, each of which is transmitted separately with its own symbology identifier, or as a single data packet. The system designer SHALL select one of these methods, but the method using symbology identifier ]E3 is preferable for data security.

5.2 Linear barcodes - EAN/UPC symbology specifications

5.2.1 Symbology characteristics

Characteristics of barcodes in the EAN/UPC symbology family include: Encodable character set: digits (0 through 9) in accordance with ISO/IEC 646: Refer to Table

7-20 for more details.

Symbology type: continuous.

Symbol character density: seven modules per symbol character.
Four elements per symbol character comprising two bars (dark bars) and two spaces (light
bars), each of one, two, three, or four modules in width (auxiliary guard patterns have differing numbers of elements). Character self-checking.
Fixed data string length encodable: 8, 12, or 13 characters including check digit, depending on
specific symbol type.

Omnidirectionally decodable.

One mandatory check digit (described in section 7.9).
Non-data overhead not including the check digit or Quiet Zones:
11 modules for EAN-13, EAN-8 and UPC-A barcodes (left guard bar pattern/centre guard bar
pattern/right guard bar pattern).

Nine modules for UPC-E barcodes (left guard bar pattern/right guard bar pattern).

5.2.1.1 Symbol types

The barcodes in the EAN/UPC symbology family are: EAN-13, UPC-A and UPC-E barcodes, all of which may be accompanied by an add-on symbol.

EAN-8 barcode.
The four symbol types are described in sections 5.2.2.1, 5.2.2.2, 5.2.2.3, and 5.2.2.4. The optional add-on symbols are described in section 5.2.2.5.

5.2.1.2 Symbol encodation

5.2.1.2.1 Symbol character encodation

Symbol characters SHALL encode digit values in seven module characters selected from different number sets known as A, B and C as shown in the figure below.

Table 5-3 Number sets A, B and C

Digit	Set A element widths	Set B element widths	Set C element widths
value
S	B	S	B	S	B	S	B	B	S	B	S
0	3 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 4 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 2 1 3 3 1 1 2	1 1 2 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 4 1 2 3 1 1 1 3 2 1 4 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 2 1 2 1 1 3	3 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 4 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 2 1 3 3 1 1 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S denotes a space (light bar), B denotes a bar (dark bar) and the element widths are in modules.

Table 5-15 graphically illustrates Table 5-3. The sum of the bar (dark bar) modules in any symbol character determines its parity. Symbol characters in number set A are odd parity characters. Symbol characters in number sets B and C are even parity characters. Number set C characters are mirror images of number set B characters.

Symbol characters in number sets A and B always begin on the left with a space module and end on the right with a dark module. Symbol characters in number set C begin on the left with a dark module and end on the right with a light module.

A data character shall normally be represented by a symbol character. However, in certain specific instances defined in sections 5.2.2.1, 5.2.2.4 and 5.2.2.5, the combination of number sets in a symbol may itself represent either data or a check digit value. This technique is referred to as variable parity encodation.

5.2.1.2.2 Auxiliary pattern encodation

Auxiliary patterns SHALL be composed as shown in Table 5-4.

Table 5-4 Auxiliary patterns

Auxiliary pattern	Number of	Element widths in modules
modules
S	B	S	B	S	B
Normal guard bar pattern	3	1	1	1
Centre guard bar pattern	5	1	1	1	1	1
Special guard bar pattern	6	1	1	1	1	1	1
Add-on guard bar pattern	4	1	1	2
Add-on delineator	2	1	1
S denotes a space (light) element and B denotes a bar (dark) element.

Section 5.2.6.2 graphically illustrates these patterns. The normal guard bar pattern corresponds to the start and stop patterns in other symbologies and the special guard bar pattern is used as a stop pattern in UPC-E barcodes.

5.2.2 Symbol formats

5.2.2.1 EAN-13 barcodes

The EAN-13 barcode SHALL be made up as follows, reading from left to right: A left Quiet Zone.

A normal guard bar pattern.
Six symbol characters from number sets A and B.
A centre guard bar pattern.
Six symbol characters from number set C.
A normal guard bar pattern.
A right Quiet Zone.
The rightmost symbol character SHALL encode the check digit calculated in accordance with section

7.9. Since the EAN-13 barcode comprises only 12 symbol characters but encodes 13 digits of data (including the check digit), the value of the additional digit, which is the character in the leftmost position in the data string, SHALL be encoded by the variable parity mix of number sets A and B for the six symbol characters in the left half of the symbol. The numbering system for values of the leading digit is specified in Table 5-5. Figure 5-11 is an example of an EAN-13 barcode.

Table 5-5 Left half of an EAN-13 barcode

Leading digit,	Number sets used for numbering left half of an EAN-13 barcode
implicitly encoded
Symbol character position
1	2	3	4	5	6
0*	A	A	A	A	A	A
1	A	A	B	A	B	B
2	A	A	B	B	A	B
3	A	A	B	B	B	A
4	A	B	A	A	B	B
5	A	B	B	A	A	B
6	A	B	B	B	A	A
7	A	B	A	B	A	B
8	A	B	A	B	B	A
9	A	B	B	A	B	A
* The leading digit value “0” is reserved for symbols encoding GTIN-12 element strings.

Figure 5-11 EAN-13 barcode

5.2.2.2 EAN-8 barcodes

The EAN-8 barcode SHALL be made up as follows, reading from left to right: A left Quiet Zone.

A normal guard bar pattern.
Four symbol characters from number set A.
A centre guard bar pattern.
Four symbol characters from number set C.
A normal guard bar pattern.
A right Quiet Zone.
The rightmost symbol character SHALL encode the check digit calculated in accordance with section

7.9. Figure 5-12 is an example of an EAN-8 barcode.

Figure 5-12 EAN-8 barcode

5.2.2.3 UPC-A barcodes

The UPC-A barcode SHALL be made up as follows, reading from left to right: A left Quiet Zone.

A normal guard bar pattern.
Six symbol characters from number set A.
A centre guard bar pattern.
Six symbol characters from number set C.
A normal guard bar pattern.
A right Quiet Zone.
The rightmost symbol character SHALL encode the check digit calculated in accordance with section

7.9. A UPC-A barcode may be decoded as a 13-digit number by adding an implied leading zero to the GTIN-12. Figure 5-13 is an example of a UPC-A barcode.

Figure 5-13 UPC-A barcode

5.2.2.4 UPC-E barcodes

The UPC-E barcode SHALL be made up as follows, reading from left to right: A left Quiet Zone.

A normal guard bar pattern.
Six symbol characters from number sets A and B.
A special guard bar pattern.
A right Quiet Zone.
The UPC-E barcode may only be used to encode GTIN-12 element strings that commence with a zero and contain a sequence of four or five zeroes in defined positions, as shown in Figure 5-14. These zeroes are removed from the data during encoding by the zero-suppression process described in section 5.2.2.4.1. Figure 5-14 is an example of a UPC-E barcode.

Figure 5-14 UPC-E barcode (encoding 012345000058 by zero-suppression)

5.2.2.4.1 Encodation of the UPC-E barcode

The following algorithm describes the encodation of a data string suitable for zero-suppression: Let D1, D2 and D3 through D12 denote the GTIN-12 data characters (including check digit). D1

SHALL always be zero. D12 SHALL be the check digit calculated according to the algorithm in section 7.9. Let X₁ and X₂ through X₆ denote the six symbol characters in the final UPC-E barcode. Convert D2 through D11 into a symbol character string by removing zeroes according to the following rules:

If	Then
 D11 equals 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9  and D7 to D10 inclusive are all 0  and D6 is not 0	 D7 to D10 are not encoded.  Symbol character: X₁ X₂ X₃ X₄ X₅ X₆  Data character: D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D11

If	Then
 D6 to D10 inclusive are all 0  and D5 is not 0	 D6 to D10 are not encoded and X₆ = 4.  Symbol character: X₁ X₂ X₃ X₄ X₅ X₆  Data character: D2 D3 D4 D5 D11 4

If	Then
 D4 is 0, 1, or 2  and D5 to D8 inclusive are all 0	 D5 to D8 are not encoded.  Symbol character: X₁ X₂ X₃ X₄ X₅ X₆  Data character: D2 D3 D9 D10 D11 D4

If	Then
 D4 is 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9  and D5 to D9 inclusive are all 0	 D5 to D9 are not encoded and X₆ = 3.  Symbol character: X₁ X₂ X₃ X₄ X₅ X₆  Data character: D2 D3 D4 D10 D11 3

Determine the number sets for the implicit encodation of D12 from Table 5-6. Encode symbol characters X₁ to X₆ using number sets A and B as determined in Step 3.

Table 5-6 Number sets for implicit encodation of D12

Value of check	Number sets used for numbering a UPC-E barcode
digit D12
Symbol Character Position
1	2	3	4	5	6
0	B	B	B	A	A	A
1	B	B	A	B	A	A
2	B	B	A	A	B	A
3	B	B	A	A	A	B
4	B	A	B	B	A	A
5	B	A	A	B	B	A
6	B	A	A	A	B	B
7	B	A	B	A	B	A
8	B	A	B	A	A	B
9	B	A	A	B	A	B

Example 1	Original data	Zero-suppressed	Rule
0	1	2	3	4	5	0	0	0	0	5	8	1	2	3	4	5	5	2a
B	A	B	A	A	B

Figure 5-15 Zero suppression example 1

Example 2	Original data	Zero-suppressed	Rule
0	4	5	6	7	0	0	0	0	0	8	0	4	5	6	7	8	4	2b
B	B	B	A	A	A

Figure 5-16 Zero suppression example 2

Example 3	Original data	Zero-suppressed	Rule
0 3	4	0 0	0 0 0	5	6	7	3	3	4	5	6	7	0	2c
B	B	A	A	A	B

Figure 5-17 Zero suppression example 3

Example 4	O	riginal data Z	ero-suppressed	Rule
0	9	8	4 0 0	0 0	0	7	5	1	9	8	4 7	5	3	2d
B	B	A B	A	A

Figure 5-18 Zero suppression example 4

Note: The number sets used to implicitly encode the check digit are shown in the zero- suppressed column.

5.2.2.4.2 Decoding a UPC-E barcode

Derivation of the 12-digit data string from the characters encoded in the UPC-E barcode SHALL be performed according to Table 5-7.

Table 5-7 Decoding a UPC-E barcode

								Decoded number
	P1	P2	P3	P4	P5	P6		D1	D2	D3	D4	D5	D6	D7	D8	D9	D10	D11	D12
(0)	X₁	X₂	X₃	X₄	X₅	0	(C)	(0)	X₁	X₂	0	0	0	0	0	X₃	X₄	X₅	(C)
(0)	X₁	X₂	X₃	X₄	X₅	1	(C)	(0)	X₁	X₂	1	0	0	0	0	X₃	X₄	X₅	(C)
(0)	X₁	X₂	X₃	X₄	X₅	2	(C)	(0)	X₁	X₂	2	0	0	0	0	X₃	X₄	X₅	(C)
(0)	X₁	X₂	X₃	X₄	X₅	3	(C)	(0)	X₁	X₂	X₃	0	0	0	0	0	X₄	X₅	(C)
(0)	X₁	X₂	X₃	X₄	X₅	4	(C)	(0)	X₁	X₂	X₃	X₄	0	0	0	0	0	X₅	(C)
(0)	X₁	X₂	X₃	X₄	X₅	5	(C)	(0)	X₁	X₂	X₃	X₄	X₅	0	0	0	0	5	(C)
(0)	X₁	X₂	X₃	X₄	X₅	6	(C)	(0)	X₁	X₂	X₃	X₄	X₅	0	0	0	0	6	(C)
(0)	X₁	X₂	X₃	X₄	X₅	7	(C)	(0)	X₁	X₂	X₃	X₄	X₅	0	0	0	0	7	(C)
(0)	X₁	X₂	X₃	X₄	X₅	8	(C)	(0)	X₁	X₂	X₃	X₄	X₅	0	0	0	0	8	(C)
(0)	X₁	X₂	X₃	X₄	X₅	9	(C)	(0)	X₁	X₂	X₃	X₄	X₅	0	0	0	0	9	(C)
Notes:  The symbol characters at positions P1 and P2 through P5 of the UPC-E barcode are represented by X₁ and X₂ through X₅.  Re-inserted zeroes are indicated by underlining.  The leading digit for UPC-E barcodes, which is not encoded, is indicated by “0”.  The check digit implicitly encoded in UPC-E barcodes is indicated by “C”.

5.2.2.5 Add-on symbols

The add-on symbols were designed for use with EAN/UPC symbols on periodicals, hardback and paperback books. Because they provide reduced security, use of add-on symbols SHALL be limited to applications where rules in the application specification governing data format and content provide appropriate safeguards.

5.2.2.5.1 Two-digit add-on symbol

A two-digit add-on symbol may be used in specific applications to accompany an EAN-13, UPC-A, or UPC-E barcode. The two-digit add-on symbol is positioned following the right Quiet Zone of the main symbol and consists of the following:

Add-on guard bar pattern.

First digit of the additional number from number sets A or B.
Add-on delineator.
Second digit of the additional number from number sets A or B.
A right Quiet Zone.
The add-on symbol has no right guard bar pattern. It does not have an explicit check digit. Checking is done through the mix of the number sets (A or B) used for the two digits. The choice of number sets is linked to the value of the additional number as shown by Table 5-8.

Table 5-8 Number sets for five-digit add-on symbols

Value of the digits carried by the add-on symbol	Left-hand digit	Right-hand digit
Multiple of 4 (00,04,08,..96)	A	A
Multiple of 4+1 (01,05,..97)	A	B
Multiple of 4+2 (02,06,..98)	B	A
Multiple of 4+3 (03,07,..99)	B	B

Figure 5-19 is an example of an EAN-13 barcode with a two-digit add-on symbol.

Figure 5-19 EAN-13 barcode with two-digit add-on symbol

5.2.2.5.2 Five-digit add-on symbol

A five-digit add-on symbol may be used in specific applications to accompany an EAN-13, UPC-A, or UPC-E barcode. The five-digit add-on symbol is positioned following the right Quiet Zone of the main symbol and consists of the following:

Add-on guard bar pattern. 2. First digit of the add-on number from number sets A or B. 3. Add-on delineator. 4. Second digit of the add-on number from number sets A or B. 5. Add-on delineator.
Third digit of the add-on number from number sets A or B. 7. Add-on delineator. 8. Fourth digit of the add-on number from number sets A or B. 9. Add-on delineator. 10. Fifth digit of the add-on number from number sets A or B.
A right Quiet Zone. The add-on symbol has no right guard bar pattern. It does not have an explicit check digit. Checking is done through the mix of the number sets (A or B) used for the five digits. A value V is determined by the following procedure:
Sum the digits in Positions one, three and five. 2. Multiply the result of step 1 by 3. 3. Sum the remaining digits (Positions two and four). 4. Multiply the result of step 3 by 9.
Sum the results of steps 2 and 4. 6. The value of V is the unit’s position (lowest-order digit) of the result of step. Example: To calculate the value of V for an add-on symbol carrying the number 86104, follow these steps:
8 + 1 + 4 = 13 2. 13 x 3 = 39 3. 6 + 0 = 6 4. 6 x 9 = 54 5. 39 + 54 = 93 6. V = 3 The number sets can then be determined by using Table 5-9.

Table 5-9 Number sets for five-digit add-on symbol

Value of V	Number sets used for symbol characters
1	2	3	4	5
0	B	B	A	A	A
1	B	A	B	A	A
2	B	A	A	B	A
3	B	A	A	A	B
4	A	B	B	A	A
5	A	A	B	B	A
6	A	A	A	B	B
7	A	B	A	B	A
8	A	B	A	A	B
9	A	A	B	A	B

Since V = 3 in Table 5-9, the sequence of number sets used to encode the value 86104 is B A A A B.

Figure 5-20 shows an example of an EAN-13 barcode with a five-digit add-on symbol.

Figure 5-20 EAN-13 barcode with five-digit add-on symbol

5.2.3 Dimensions and tolerances

5.2.3.1 Nominal dimensions of characters

Barcodes can be printed at various densities to accommodate a variety of printing and scanning processes. The significant dimensional parameter is X, the ideal width of a single module element.

The X-dimension must be constant throughout a given symbol. The dimensions of EAN-13, UPC-A, EAN-8 and UPC-E barcodes are referenced to a defined set of dimensions referred to as the nominal size symbol. Refer to section 5.2.6.6 for dimensioned drawings of nominal size symbols.

The X-dimension at nominal size is 0.330 millimetre (0.0130 inch). The width of each bar (dark bar) and space (light bar) is determined by multiplying the X-dimension by the module width of each bar (dark bar) and space (light bar) (1, 2, 3 or 4). There is an exception for characters 1, 2, 7 and 8. For these characters, the bars (dark bars) and spaces (light bars) are reduced or enlarged by one-thirteenth of a module to provide a uniform distribution of bar width tolerances and thus improve scanning reliability.

The reduction or enlargement in millimetres at nominal size of the bars (dark bars) and spaces (light bars) for the characters 1, 2, 7 and 8 in the number sets A, B and C is shown in Table 5-10.

Table 5-10 Reduction/enlargement for characters 1, 2, 7 and 8

Number set A	Number sets B and C
Character value	Character value	Bar (dark bar)	Space (light bar)	Bar (dark bar)	Space (light bar)
mm	mm	mm	mm
1 2 7 8	- 0.025 - 0.025 +0.025 +0.025	+0.025 +0.025 - 0.025 - 0.025	+0.025 +0.025 - 0.025 - 0.025	- 0.025 - 0.025 +0.025 +0.025

Note: The existing symbol generation equipment that uses a value of 0.030 millimetre for the reduction/enlargement factor at nominal size will continue to be used for the foreseeable future.

5.2.3.2 Symbol height

For EAN-13, UPC-A and UPC-E barcodes the height of the symbol at the nominal size is 22.85 millimetres (0.900 inch). For EAN-8 barcodes the height of the symbol at the nominal size is 18.23 millimetres (0.718 inch).

The height of any two-digit or five-digit add-on symbol used must not extend outside the symbol height dimensions of the main symbol. In EAN-13, EAN-8, UPC-A and UPC-E barcodes, the bars (dark bars) forming the left, centre and right guard bar patterns SHALL be extended downward by 5x (e.g., 1.65 millimetres (0.065 inch).

This SHALL also apply to the bars (dark bars) of the first and last symbol characters of the UPC-A barcode. Note: The height of an EAN/UPC barcode no longer includes the human readable interpretation and is the height of the bars only. The measurement of bar height does not include the extended height of either the guard patterns in EAN/UPC barcodes or the first and last symbol characters of a UPC-A barcode.

Symbol height is not modular.

5.2.3.3 X-dimension (magnification factor)

In the past the term "magnification factor" was extensively used to specify the size of a barcode. This technique relied upon setting a nominal size (100 percent) that was directly related to a given X-dimension. Since January 2000, the term “X-dimension” has been used to specify permissible symbol sizes (see section 5.12). The X-dimension of an add-on symbol SHALL be the same as the X- dimension of its associated main symbol.

5.2.3.4 Quiet Zone

The minimum Quiet Zone width required by the main symbol is 7x. However, other minimum Quiet Zone dimensions are specified for some symbol types due to the size and location of their human readable interpretation. These dimensions are noted in Table 5-11.

Table 5-11 Quiet Zone widths by version

Symbol version	Left Quiet Zone	Right Quiet Zone
Modules	mm*	Modules	mm

Symbol version	Left Quiet Zone	Right Quiet Zone
EAN-13 EAN-8 UPC-A UPC-E Add-ons (EAN) Add-ons (U.P.C.)	11 7 9 9 7-12 9-12	3.63 2.31 2.97 2.97 2.31-3.96 2.97-3.96	7 7 9 7 5 5	2.31 2.31 2.97 2.31 1.65 1.65
* This is an example using an X-dimension of 0.330 millimetres.

Note: A useful device to help maintain the Quiet Zone in some production processes is to include a less than (<) and/or greater than (>) character in the human readable interpretation field, with its apex aligned with the edge of the Quiet Zone. If this device is used, the character(s) SHALL be positioned in accordance with the appropriate drawings in section 5.2.6.6.

5.2.3.5 Symbol length

The symbol length in modules, including the minimum Quiet Zones, SHALL be as indicated in the table below.

Table 5-12 Symbol length in modules

Symbol type	Length
EAN-13	113
UPC-A	113
EAN-8	81
UPC-E	67
Two-digit add-on	25
Five-digit add-on	52
EAN-13 or UPC-A and two-digit add-on	138
UPC-E and two-digit add-on	92
EAN-13 or UPC-A and five-digit add-on	165
UPC-E and five-digit add-on	119

5.2.3.6 Positioning of the add-on symbol

The add-on symbol SHALL NOT encroach on the right Quiet Zone of the main symbol. The maximum separation SHALL be 12X. The bottom edge of the bars (dark bars) in the add-on symbol SHALL be horizontally aligned with the bottom edge of the guard bars of the main symbol.

5.2.4 Reference decode algorithm

Decode algorithms are used by scanning equipment to convert the bar and space patterns of the barcode into data characters. As a matter of policy, GS1 makes no attempt to specify or standardise equipment beyond stating that it should be capable of reading symbols produced in accordance with the specifications laid out in this manual.

Barcode reader systems are designed to read imperfect symbols to the extent that practical algorithms permit. This section describes the reference decode algorithm used to determine decode and decodability in symbol verification in accordance with ISO 15416.

For each symbol character, let S equal the total measured width of the character. The value S is used to determine reference threshold (RT) values. Individual edge to similar edge measurements (e) are then compared to the reference threshold to determine E values. Character values are determined from E values.

Value e1 is defined as the measurement from the leading edge of a bar (dark bar) to the leading edge of the adjacent bar (dark bar). Value e2 is defined as the measurement from the trailing edge of a bar (dark bar) to the trailing edge of the adjacent bar (dark bar). For number sets A and B, the right edge of each of the two bars (dark bars) is considered to be leading, while for number set C, the left edge of each bar (dark bar) is considered to be leading. These relationships are illustrated in the figure below.

Number Set C S b2 b1 Leading Adjacent Edge Character e1 e2 Number Sets A and B S b2 b1 Adjacent Leading Character Edge e2 e1

Figure 5-21 Symbol character decode measurements

Reference thresholds RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4 and RT5 are given by: RT1 = (1.5/7)S

RT2 = (2.5/7)S
RT3 = (3.5/7)S
RT4 = (4.5/7)S
RT5 = (5.5/7)S
Within each character, the measurements e1 and e2 are compared with the reference thresholds.

The corresponding integer values E1 and E2 are considered to be equal to 2, 3, 4, or 5 as follows: If RT1 <= ei < RT2, Ei = 2

If RT2 <= ei < RT3, Ei = 3
If RT3 <= ei < RT4, Ei = 4
If RT4 <= ei < RT5, Ei = 5
Otherwise the character is in error.

Table 5-13, use the values of E1 and E2 as the primary determinant for the symbol character value.

Table 5-13 Barcode decoding

Character	Number set	Primary determinant	Secondary determinant
E1 E2	7(b1 + b2)/S
0	A	2	3
1	A	3	4	<= 4
2	A	4	3	<= 4
3	A	2	5
4	A	5	4
5	A	4	5
6	A	5	2
7	A	3	4	>4
8	A	4	3	>4
9	A	3	2
0	B and C	5	3
1	B and C	4	4	>3
2	B and C	3	3	>3
3	B and C	5	5
4	B and C	2	4
5	B and C	3	5
6	B and C	2	2
7	B and C	4	4	<= 3
8	B and C	3	3	<= 3
9	B and C	4	2
b1 and b2 are the widths of the two bar (dark bar) elements

The character is uniquely determined for all combinations of E1 and E2 except for the following four cases: E1 = 3 and E2 = 4 (characters 1 and 7 in number set A).

E1 = 4 and E2 = 3 (characters 2 and 8 in number set A).
E1 = 4 and E2 = 4 (characters 1 and 7 in number sets B and C).
E1 = 3 and E2 = 3 (characters 2 and 8 in number sets B and C).
These cases require that the combined width of the two bars (dark bars) be tested as follows:

For E1 = 3 and E2 = 4:

Character is 1 if 7 x (b1 + b2) / S <= 4
Character is 7 if 7 x (b1 + b2) / S > 4
For E1 = 4 and E2 = 3:
Character is 2 if 7 x (b1 + b2) / S <=4
Character is 8 if 7 x (b1 + b2) / S > 4
For E1 = 4 and E2 = 4:
Character is 1 if 7 x (b1 + b2) / S > 3
Character is 7 if 7 x (b1 + b2) / S <= 3
For E1 = 3 and E2 = 3:
Character is 2 if 7 x (b1 + b2) / S > 3
Character is 8 if 7 x (b1 + b2) / S <= 3
The requirements on (b1 + b2) are shown in Table 5-13.

The same procedures SHALL be used to decode the symbol characters in any add-on symbol. Use the figure below to determine the appropriate S measurement for calculating the reference threshold values RT1 and RT2 applicable to the auxiliary patterns of the main symbol. For each symbol or half symbol, the measurements of the appropriate auxiliary pattern ei values are then compared to the reference thresholds to establish the integer Ei values. The determined values of E1, E2, E3 and E4 SHALL match those of valid auxiliary patterns as shown in Table 5-14. Otherwise the symbol is in error.

1) Normal Guard Bar Pattern - Left e 1 s First Character	2) Normal Guard Bar Pattern- Right s e 1 Check Character

Centre Guard

e e 2 ceding e 1 e 3 Bars	e
ceding Bars

Charac Centre

lowing d Bars

Adjacent Character s6 s7 Character Preceding Character Following Centre Guard Bars Centre Guard Bars Use S6 with e1, e2, e3 Use S7 with e2, e3, e4 4) Special Guard e2 e4 Adjacent Character s Last Character e3 e1

Figure 5-22 Auxiliary pattern measurements

Table 5-14 Main symbol auxiliary pattern E values

Auxiliary guard patterns	E1	E2	E3	E4
Normal guard bar pattern	2
Centre guard bar pattern (left half)	2	2	2
Centre guard bar pattern (right half)	2	2	2
Special guard bar pattern	2	2	2	2

5.2.5 Human readable interpretation

The human readable digits SHALL be printed underneath the main symbol and above the add-on symbol. A clearly legible font SHALL be used for these digits and OCR-B as defined in ISO 1073-2:

Alphanumeric character sets for optical recognition; Part 2: Character set OCR-B; Shapes and dimensions of the printed image, is recommended. This font is referenced only as a convenient standard typeface and it is not intended that these characters be machine read or verified.

Reasonable alternative type fonts and character sizes are acceptable provided the human readable interpretation is clearly legible. All the encoded digits for EAN-13, UPC-A, EAN-8 barcodes and the add-on symbols SHALL be shown in human readable interpretation form. For UPC-E barcodes, the six digits directly encoded together with the leading zero and the implicitly encoded check digit SHALL be shown in human readable interpretation form. Figures 5-11, 5-12, 5-13, 5-14, 5-19 and 5-20 illustrate each type of symbol and its human readable interpretation.

The minimum space between the top of the digits and the bottom of the bars (dark bars) SHALL be 0.5X. Normally the minimum is one module, which is close enough to keep the human readable interpretation associated with the symbol.

In the EAN-13, the leftmost digit, which is encoded by variable parity, is printed to the left of the start guard pattern in line with the other digits. For UPC-A and UPC-E barcodes, the size of the first and last digits should be reduced to a maximum width equivalent to four modules. The height is reduced proportionally. The right-hand side of the first digit is positioned five module widths to the left of the leftmost guard bar. The left-hand side of the last digit is positioned five module widths to the right of the rightmost guard bar for UPC-A barcodes and three module widths for UPC-E barcodes. The bottom edge of the first and last digit SHALL be aligned with the bottom edge of the remaining full size digits.

The human readable interpretation of the add-on symbol SHALL be above the symbol. The digits SHALL be the same height as those of the main symbol. The upper edges of the digits are aligned with the upper edges of the bars (dark bars) of the main symbol. The minimum space between the bottom of the digits and the top of the bars (dark bars) SHALL be 0.5X.

Some industries use specific variations of the recommended human readable interpretation, such as inserted hyphens to segment the number field.

5.2.6 Additional features

5.2.6.1 Character values in the EAN/UPC symbology family

Table 5-15 Composition of EAN/UPC symbol characters

Value of character	Number set A (odd)	Number set B (even)	Number set C (even)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

5.2.6.2 Auxiliary characters in the EAN/UPC symbology family

Table 5-16 Composition of EAN/UPC auxiliary characters

Auxiliary character
Normal guard bar pattern (right and left)
Centre guard bar pattern
UPC-E Right guard bar pattern

5.2.6.3 Logical structure of an EAN-13 and UPC-A barcode excluding Quiet Zones

Table 5-17 Logical structure of an EAN-13 or UPC-A barcode

Logical structure of an EAN-13 or UPC-A barcode (excluding Quiet Zones)
Left guard bar pattern	Characters 12 through 7 (left half)	Centre guard bar pattern	Characters 6 through 1 (right half)	Right guard bar pattern
3 modules	42 modules (6x7)	5 modules	42 modules (6x7)	3 modules
Total number of modules = 95

Table 5-18 Combination of number sets representing the thirteenth character of an EAN-13

Character position
Value of the	Number set used for	Number set used for representing characters 6 through 1
thirteenth	representing characters
character	12 through 7
12	11	10	9	8	7	6	5	4	3	2	1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9	A A A A A A A A A A	A A A A B B B B B B	A B B B A B B A A B	A A B B A A B B B A	A B A B B A A A B B	A B B A B B A B A A	ALWAYS USE NUMBER SET C

5.2.6.4 Logical structure of an EAN-8 Barcode excluding Quiet Zones

Table 5-19 Logical structure of an EAN-8 barcode

Logical structure of an EAN-8 barcode (excluding Quiet Zones)
Left guard bar pattern	Characters 8 Through 5 (Left Half)	Centre guard bar pattern	Characters 4 Through 1 (Right Half)	Right guard bar pattern
3 modules	28 modules (4x7)	5 modules	28 modules (4x7)	3 modules
Total number of modules = 67

Table 5-20 Number sets for EAN-8 barcode characters

Character position
Number set used for representing characters 8 through 5	Number set used for representing characters 4 through 1
8	7	6	5	4	3	2	1
ALWAYS USE NUMBER SET A	ALWAYS USE NUMBER SET C

5.2.6.5 Logical structure of a UPC-E barcode excluding Quiet Zones

Table 5-21 Logical structure of a UPC-E barcode

Logical Structure of a UPC-E Barcode (Excluding Quiet Zones)
Normal guard bar pattern	Six Symbol Characters (Note the use of variable parity)	Special guard bar pattern (UPC-E)
3 modules	42 modules (6x7)	6 modules
Total number of modules = 51

Table 5-22 Number sets for UPC-E barcode characters

Value of prefix	Value of check	Number sets used for numbering a UPC-E barcode
digit	digit
1	2	3	4	5	6
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0	0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9	B B B B B B B B B B	B B B B A A A A A A	B A A A B A A B B A	A B A A B B A A A B	A A B A A B B B A A	A A A B A A B A B B

5.2.6.6 Symbol dimensions at nominal size (X-dimension = 0.330 mm, not to scale)

All measurements in the following figures are in millimetres.

Figure 5-23 EAN-13 barcode

Figure 5-24 UPC-A barcode

Figure 5-25 EAN-8 barcode

Figure 5-26 UPC-E barcode

Figure 5-27 UPC-A barcode with two-digit add-on symbol

Figure 5-28 EAN-13 barcode with five-digit add-on symbol

5.2.6.7 Dimensions of modules and symbols

Minimum, target, and maximum module size are detailed in the GS1 symbol specification tables, section 5.12.3. The module size chosen SHOULD be selected with the recommendations offered in section 5.12.4.1.3 Symbol size will depend on the module size chosen.

5.3 Linear barcodes - ITF-14 symbology specifications

5.3.1 Symbology characteristics

In the GS1 system, the characteristics of ITF-14 symbols are: Encodable character set: digits 0 through 9, in accordance with ISO/IEC 646. Refer to Table

7-20 for more details.

Code type: continuous.

Elements per symbol character: five (two wide and three narrow) encoded as either five bars
(dark bars) or five spaces (light bars).

Self-checking symbol character.

Data string length encodable: fixed length at 14 digits.
Bidirectionally decodable.
One check digit is required (see section 7.9).
The symbol character density for ITF-14 is 16 to 18 modules per symbol character pair,
depending on the wide-to-narrow ratio. The value is 16, based on the target ratio of 2.5 to 1.

The non-data overhead is eight to nine modules, depending on the wide-to-narrow ratio. The

value is 8.5, based on the target ratio of 2.5 to 1.

5.3.2 Symbol structure

An ITF-14 symbol includes: A left Quiet Zone.

A start pattern.
Seven pairs of symbol characters representing data.
A stop pattern.
A right Quiet Zone.

5.3.2.1 Character encodation

5.3.2.1.1 Data character encodation

Table 5-23 defines the ITF-14 symbol’s character encodation. In the binary representation column, the character 1 represents a wide element and 0 represents a narrow element.

Table 5-23 Binary representation of character encodation

Data character	Binary representation
0	0	0	1	1	0
1	1	0	0	0	1
2	0	1	0	0	1
3	1	1	0	0	0
4	0	0	1	0	1
5	1	0	1	0	0

Data character	Binary representation
6	0	1	1	0	0
7	0	0	0	1	1
8	1	0	0	1	0
9	0	1	0	1	0

Table 5-23 uses a modified binary coded decimal encoding scheme. The four leftmost bit positions for each character are assigned weights of 1, 2, 4 and 7, from left to right; the fifth position is used for an even parity bit. The sum of the positional weights of the 1 bits is equivalent to the data character value, except in the case of data character 0, where the weights 4 and 7 are applied. The parity bit ensures that there are always two 1 bits per character.

The algorithm shown in Table 5-24 defines the rules for converting numeric data into the symbol characters of an ITF-14 symbol (numeric data equals the Global Trade Item Number (GTIN) and, therefore, already contains the check digit).

Table 5-24 Rules for converting numeric data into symbol characters

Step in algorithm	Example
1. Calculate check digit for 0367123456789 2. With ITF-14 symbols, the data string, including the check digit, will always be a 14-digit number. The leftmost four digits of this number are 0367.	367 0367
3. Subdivide the numeric string into digit pairs. The leftmost four digits of the number are 0367.	0367 03 and 67
4. Encode the digit pairs as follows:  Encode the leading digit of each pair into bar patterns, as shown in Table 5-23  Encode the second digit of each pair into space patterns, as shown in Table 5-23	0 and 6 3 and 7
5. Form each symbol character pair by taking the bar (dark bar) and space (light bar) elements alternately from the patterns derived from the two steps in 4, commencing with the first bar (dark bar) of the pattern for the first digit, followed by the first space (light bar) of the pattern for the second digit.

Figure 5-29 illustrates the sequence of bar (dark bar) and space (light bar) elements corresponding to the data character pairs 03 and 67. 0 6 NEXT CHAR. 3 7

Figure 5-29 ITF-14 symbol character pairs encoding 03 and 67

5.3.2.1.2 Start and stop patterns

The start pattern SHALL consist of four narrow elements in the sequence “bar (dark bar) - space (light bar) - bar (dark bar) - space (light bar).” The stop pattern SHALL consist of a “wide bar (dark bar) - narrow space (light bar) - narrow bar (dark bar)” sequence.

The start pattern SHALL be positioned at the normal left end of the symbol characters adjacent to the first bar (dark bar) of the most significant digit. The stop pattern SHALL be positioned at the normal right end of the symbol characters adjacent to the final space (light bar) of the least significant digit.

There is no assigned human readable interpretation of the start and stop patterns and they SHALL NOT be transmitted by the decoder. Figure 5-30 illustrates the start and stop patterns and their relationship to the symbol characters.

First char. Last char. Quiet Zone Quiet Zone START STOP

Figure 5-30 Start and stop patterns

Figure 5-31 illustrates a complete barcode for the number 1234, showing the necessary Quiet

Zones. Quiet Zone Start 1st Character Pair 2nd Character Pair Stop Quiet Zone 1234

Figure 5-31 ITF-14 symbol inclusive of Quiet Zones

5.3.2.1.3 Check digit

A check digit is required in the ITF-14 symbology. Section 7.9 defines the check digit position and calculation.

5.3.2.2 Dimensions and tolerances

ITF-14 symbols SHALL use the following nominal dimensions: Width of narrow element (X): the X-dimension of ITF-14 symbols is defined by the application

specification based on the needs of the application. Refer to section 5.12.2.6 for specifications by application area. The wide/narrow ratio (N): the range is 2.25:1 to 3.0:1 but the actual wide-to-narrow ratio is
defined by the application specification based on the needs of the application. Refer to section

5.12.2.6 for specifications by application area. The Quiet Zones to the right and left of the symbol are compulsory. The minimum width of each

Quiet Zone is 10X.

A minimum space of 1.02 millimetre (0.040 inch) between the bottom line of the bearer bar and

the top of the human readable characters is required.

The length of an ITF-14 symbol, including Quiet Zones, is calculated from the following expression: W = (P(4N+6)+N+6)X+2Q Where: W is the length in millimetres.

P is the number of character pairs.
N is the wide-to-narrow ratio.
X is the width of a narrow element in millimetres.
Q is the width of the Quiet Zone in millimetres.
As an example, for an ITF-14 symbol that has seven character pairs, a target wide-to-narrow ratio of 2.5:1, a target X width of 1.016 millimetres (0.0400 inch) and Quiet Zone widths of 10.16 millimetres (0.400 inch) the total symbol width is 142.75 millimetres (5.620 inches).

5.3.2.3 Reference decode algorithm

Barcode reading systems are designed to read imperfect symbols to the extent that practical algorithms permit. This section describes the reference decode algorithm used in the computation of the decodability value described in ISO/IEC 15416. Decodability SHALL be determined as follows:

Within each ITF-14 symbol character (representing two digits), sort the bars (bi) and spaces (si)

such that:

b1<b2<b3<b4<b5 s1<s2<s3<s4<s5 The determined X-dimension (Z) is given by:

Z = b1 + b2 + b3 + s1 + s2 + s3 / 6

Separation value (V1) is:

V1 = (d/Z) – 0.5 where d = the smaller of (b4 – b3) or (s4 – s3) Uniformity value (V2) is:
V2 = 1 – u/Z where u = the largest of: b5 – b4 b3 – b1 s5 – s4 s3 – s1 Narrowest element value (V3) is:
V3 = [(n/Z) – 0.25] / 0.75 where n = the smaller of s1 or b1 For each symbol character, determine the decodability value V. V is the smallest of V1, V2, or V3.
The scan profile decodability value is the smallest value of V measured in a Scan Reflectance
Profile (SRP). The reference decode algorithm fails when V exhibits a negative value.

The decodability grade for each profile is determined from the decodability value according to

ISO/IEC 15416.

5.3.2.4 Bearer bars

The purpose of a bearer bar is to equalise the pressure exerted by the printing plate over the entire surface of the symbol and to enhance reading reliability by helping to reduce the probability of misreads or short scans that may occur when a skewed scanning beam enters or exits the barcode through its top or bottom edge.

The bearer bar is mandatory unless it is not technically feasible to apply it (in which case reading reliability will be reduced). For printing methods requiring printing plates, the nominal bearer bar has a constant thickness of 4.83 millimetres (0.190 inch) and must completely surround the symbol, including its Quiet Zones and butt directly against the top and bottom of the bars (dark bars) of the symbol.

For printing methods that do not require printing plates, the bearer bar SHALL be a minimum of twice the width of a narrow bar (dark bar) and need only appear at the top and bottom of the symbol, butting directly against the top and bottom of the symbol bars (dark bars). The bearer bar may extend above and below the Quiet Zones. However, it is not mandatory to print the vertical sections of the bearer bar. See figure below.

1 5 4 0 0 1 4 1 2 8 8 7 6 3

3
1 5 4 0 0 1 4 1 2 8 8 7 6

Figure 5-32 ITF symbols with bearer bars

5.3.2.5 Human readable interpretation

For human readable interpretation rules see section 4.14. For HRI rules specific to regulated healthcare retail consumer trade items, see section 4.14.1.

5.3.3 Additional features (informative)

5.3.3.1 Protection against short scans

In ITF-14 symbols, the bar (dark bar) patterns of the start and stop patterns may be found at the respective end and beginning of certain encoded symbol characters within the code. There is, therefore, no guarantee that a partial scan of the symbol will not produce a valid read for an embedded symbol having fewer characters.

In the GS1 system, short scans are very unlikely to happen, as the symbol must always contain 14 digits. However, a symbol containing more than 14 digits may cause a short scan of 14 digits. In this instance, the check digit offers security to detect this error. These are the measures that SHALL be taken to minimise the risk of partial read.

5.3.3.2 Fixed length symbols

In any application standard, the number of characters encoded in an ITF-14 symbol SHALL be fixed for that application and reading or data processing equipment SHOULD be programmed to only accept messages of that defined length. An ITF-14 symbol must always carry a 14-digit number.

5.3.4 Guidelines for the use of ITF-14 (informative)

5.3.4.1 Autodiscrimination compatibility

ITF-14 symbols may be read by suitably programmed barcode readers that are designed to autodiscriminate the ITF-14 symbology from other symbologies. The ITF-14 symbology is fully distinguishable from and compatible with many symbologies including the ISO standard symbologies. The decoder's valid set of symbologies SHOULD be limited to those needed by a given application to maximise reading security.

5.3.4.2 System considerations

It is important that the various components making up a barcode installation system (e.g., printers, labels, readers) operate in concert. A failure in any component, or a mismatch between components, can compromise the performance of the overall system.

5.3.5 Symbology identifier (informative)

The symbology identifier allocated to the ITF-14 symbol in ISO/IEC 15424, which is added as a preamble to the decoded data by a suitably programmed barcode reader, is: ]Im where: ] is ASCII character 93.

I (upper case I) is the code character for the ITF-14 symbology. m is a modifier character. Note: The symbology identifier ]I1 is the only symbology identifier used by GS1 with the ITF-14 symbol. This information SHALL NOT be encoded in the barcode, but SHALL be generated by the decoder after decoding and transmitting as a preamble to the data message. The value of “m” in the symbology identifier is equal to 1, which indicates the check digit has been validated and transmitted by the scanner.

5.3.6 Test specifications (informative)

To verify whether a symbol meets the specifications of the GS1 system, it SHALL be tested using the specification defined in ISO/IEC 15416, which details the conditions under which measurements SHALL be made. The specification defines methods of determining an overall quality grade based on the attributes of the barcode and determining its conformity with the system. For ITF-14 symbols, the reference decode algorithm SHALL be the algorithm specified in section 5.3.2.3.

Full details on barcode production and quality assessment can be found in section 5.12. The verifier SHALL determine the average wide-to-narrow ratio (N) for each profile. The value N is computed character by character, then averaged over all characters in the symbol. The range indicated below is passing:

2.25 <N < 3.00

N is calculated for each symbol character (pair of data digits) according to the following rule: Ni = 1.5*[(b4 + b5 + s4 + s5)/(b1 + b2 + b3 + s1 + s2 + s3)] The value N for the profile is then obtained by averaging the Ni for all characters in the symbol.

Figure 5-33 ITF-14 symbol: Main dimensions at X-dimension 1.016 mm (0.0400 in.)

Note: diagram is not intended to be used as a basis for measurement.

5.4 Linear barcodes - GS1-128 symbology specifications

The GS1-128 barcode has been carefully designed through joint co-operation between GS1 and AIM (Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility). Use of GS1-128 barcodes provides a high degree of security and distinguishes GS1 system element strings from extraneous non-standard barcodes.

The GS1-128 symbology is a subset of the more general Code 128 symbology. By agreement between AIM and GS1, use of the Function 1 Symbol Character (FNC1) in Code 128 symbols in the first symbol character position following the start character has been reserved exclusively for the GS1 system. Code 128 is fully described in ISO/IEC 15417, Information Technology - Automatic Identification and Data Capture Techniques - Bar code Symbology Specification - Code 128. The information covered in the GS1 General Specifications includes:

Sections 5.4.1, 5.4.2, 5.4.3, 5.4.4, 5.4.5 and 5.4.6: GS1-128 symbology subset (using ISO/IEC

15417 for reference).

Section 5.4.7: GS1-128 symbology application parameters.

Section 7.8: Processing of data from a GS1 symbology using GS1 Application Identifiers.

5.4.1 GS1-128 symbology characteristics

The characteristics of the GS1-128 symbology are: Encodable character set:

The GS1 system requires that only the subset of ISO/IEC 646 International Reference
Version defined in these GS1 General Specifications be used for GS1 Application Identifier (AI) element strings. Refer to Table 7-20 for the allowed encodable character set. Characters with ASCII values 128 to 255 may also be encoded in Code 128 symbols.
Characters with ASCII values 128 to 255 accessed by Function 4 Symbol Character (FNC4) are reserved for future use and are not used in GS1-128 barcodes. Four non-data function characters. FNC2 and FNC4 are not used in GS1-128 barcodes.
Four code set selection characters (including single character code set shift).
Three start characters.
One stop character.
Continuous code type.
Six elements per symbol character comprising three bars (dark bars) and three spaces (light
bars), each one, two, three, or four modules in width. The stop character is made up of seven elements comprising four bars (dark bars) and three spaces (light bars). Character self-checking.
Variable symbol length.
Bi-directionally decodable.
One mandatory symbol check character (see section 5.4.3.6).
Data character density is 11 modules per symbol character (5.5 modules per numeric character
in code set C, 13 modules per stop character).

Non-data overhead:

GS1-128 barcodes have a special double character start pattern consisting of the
appropriate start character and immediately followed by a Function 1 Symbol Character

Code (FNC1). The FNC1 adds to the symbol’s non-data overhead. The total symbol overhead is 46 modules. The FNC1 character may also be used as a separator character between element strings not

contained in the Table 7-6.

GS1-128 barcode size characteristics:

The maximum physical length is 165.10 millimetres (6.500 inch) including Quiet Zones.
The maximum number of data characters in a single symbol is 48.
For a given length of data, the symbol size is variable between limits in X-dimension to
accommodate the ranges in quality achievable by the various printing processes.

5.4.2 GS1-128 barcode structure

The GS1-128 barcode is made up as follows, reading from left to right: Left Quiet Zone

The double character start pattern:
A start character (A, B, or C)

The Function 1 Symbol Character (FNC1) Data (including the GS1 Application Identifier represented in character set A, B, or C).

A symbol check character.
The stop character.
Right Quiet Zone.
For human readable interpretation rules see section 4.14. For HRI rules specific to regulated healthcare retail consumer trade items, see section 4.14.1.

Figure 5-34 General format of a GS1-128 barcode

5.4.3 GS1-128 symbology character assignments

Table 5-25 defines all the Code 128 character assignments. In the element width column, the numeric values represent the widths of the elements in modules or multiples of the X-dimension. GS1-128 barcode character assignments are identical to Code 128 symbol character assignments.

5.4.3.1 Symbol character structure

The sum of the bar modules in any symbol character is always even (even parity) and the sum of the space modules is, therefore, always odd. This parity feature enables character self-checking.

1	2
2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 1 4 1 2

Figure 5-35 GS1-128 barcode start character A

Figure 5-36 illustrates the encodation of one symbol character, which represents the single data character C in both code sets A or B or the two distinct data character digits 3 and 5 in code set C.

9	10
2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 3 1 3 1

Figure 5-36 Symbol character value 35

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 2 3 3 1 1 1 2

Figure 5-37 GS1-128 barcode stop character

5.4.3.2 Data character encodation

Code 128 has three character sets, which are shown in Table 5-25 as code sets A, B and C. GS1- 128 symbology specifies a character subset of ISO/IEC 646 International Reference Version to ensure international compatibility. For more information see Table 7-20.

The symbol character bar (dark bar) and space (light bar) patterns shown in Table 5-25 represent the data characters listed under the columns for code set A, B, or C. Each symbol character in code set C encodes two data character digits or one of three auxiliary characters (code A, code B and Function 1). The choice of code set depends on the start character, the use of code A, code B or code C characters, or the shift character. If the symbol begins with start character A, then code set A is defined initially. Code set B and code set C are similarly defined by beginning the symbol with start character B or C, respectively. The code set can be redefined within the symbol by using code A, code B and code C characters or the shift character (see section 5.4.3 for the use of special characters).

The same data may be represented by different Code 128 symbols through the use of different combinations of start character, code set and shift characters. The individual applications do not specify code sets A, B, or C. section 5.4.7.6 contains rules to minimise the length of the symbol for any given data.

Each symbol character is assigned a numeric value listed in Table 5-25. This value is used in calculating the symbol check character value. It may also be used to provide a conversion to and from ASCII values (see section 5.4.7.6).

Table 5-25 Code 128 character encodation

Symbol character value	Code set A	ASCII	Code set B	ASCII	Code set C	Element widths (Modules)	Element pattern
value	value
for	for
code	code
set A	set B
B	S	B	S	B	S	1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8	9	10	11
0	space	32	space	32	00	2	1	2	2	2	2
1	!	33	!	33	01	2	2	2	1	2	2
2	"	34	"	34	02	2	2	2	2	2	1
3	#	35	#	35	03	1	2	1	2	2	3
4	$	36	$	36	04	1	2	1	3	2	2
5	%	37	%	37	05	1	3	1	2	2	2
6	&	38	&	38	06	1	2	2	2	1	3
7	apos- trophe	39	apos- trophe	39	07	1	2	2	3	1	2
8	(	40	(	40	08	1	3	2	2	1	2
9	)	41	)	41	09	2	2	1	2	1	3
10	*	42	*	42	10	2	2	1	3	1	2
11	+	43	+	43	11	2	3	1	2	1	2
12	comma	44	comm a	44	12	1	1	2	2	3	2
13	-	45	-	45	13	1	2	2	1	3	2
14	full stop	46	full stop	46	14	1	2	2	2	3	1
15	/	47	/	47	15	1	1	3	2	2	2
16	0	48	0	48	16	1	2	3	1	2	2
17	1	49	1	49	17	1	2	3	2	2	1
18	2	50	2	50	18	2	2	3	2	1	1
19	3	51	3	51	19	2	2	1	1	3	2
20	4	52	4	52	20	2	2	1	2	3	1

Symbol character value	Code set A	ASCII	Code set B	ASCII	Code set C	Element widths (Modules)	Element pattern
value	value
for	for
code	code
set A	set B
B	S	B	S	B	S	1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8	9	10	11
21	5	53	5	53	21	2	1	3	2	1	2
22	6	54	6	54	22	2	2	3	1	1	2
23	7	55	7	55	23	3	1	2	1	3	1
24	8	56	8	56	24	3	1	1	2	2	2
25	9	57	9	57	25	3	2	1	1	2	2
26	colon	58	colon	58	26	3	2	1	2	2	1
27	semi- colon	59	semi- colon	59	27	3	1	2	2	1	2
28	<	60	<	60	28	3	2	2	1	1	2
29	=	61	=	61	29	3	2	2	2	1	1
30	>	62	>	62	30	2	1	2	1	2	3
31	?	63	?	63	31	2	1	2	3	2	1
32	@	64	@	64	32	2	3	2	1	2	1
33	A	65	A	65	33	1	1	1	3	2	3
34	B	66	B	66	34	1	3	1	1	2	3
35	C	67	C	67	35	1	3	1	3	2	1
36	D	68	D	68	36	1	1	2	3	1	3
37	E	69	E	69	37	1	3	2	1	1	3
38	F	70	F	70	38	1	3	2	3	1	1
39	G	71	G	71	39	2	1	1	3	1	3
40	H	72	H	72	40	2	3	1	1	1	3
41	I	73	I	73	41	2	3	1	3	1	1
42	J	74	J	74	42	1	1	2	1	3	3
43	K	75	K	75	43	1	1	2	3	3	1
44	L	76	L	76	44	1	3	2	1	3	1
45	M	77	M	77	45	1	1	3	1	2	3
46	N	78	N	78	46	1	1	3	3	2	1
47	O	79	O	79	47	1	3	3	1	2	1
48	P	80	P	80	48	3	1	3	1	2	1
49	Q	81	Q	81	49	2	1	1	3	3	1
50	R	82	R	82	50	2	3	1	1	3	1
51	S	83	S	83	51	2	1	3	1	1	3
52	T	84	T	84	52	2	1	3	3	1	1
53	U	85	U	85	53	2	1	3	1	3	1
54	V	86	V	86	54	3	1	1	1	2	3
55	W	87	W	87	55	3	1	1	3	2	1
56	X	88	X	88	56	3	3	1	1	2	1
57	Y	89	Y	89	57	3	1	2	1	1	3
58	Z	90	Z	90	58	3	1	2	3	1	1
59	[	91	[	91	59	3	3	2	1	1	1
60	\	92	\	92	60	3	1	4	1	1	1

Symbol character value	Code set A	ASCII	Code set B	ASCII	Code set C	Element widths (Modules)	Element pattern
value	value
for	for
code	code
set A	set B
B	S	B	S	B	S	1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8	9	10	11
61	]	93	]	93	61	2	2	1	4	1	1
62	^	94	^	94	62	4	3	1	1	1	1
63	_	95	_	95	63	1	1	1	2	2	4
64	NUL	00	grave accent	96	64	1	1	1	4	2	2
65	SOH	01	a	97	65	1	2	1	1	2	4
66	STX	02	b	98	66	1	2	1	4	2	1
67	ETX	03	c	99	67	1	4	1	1	2	2
68	EOT	04	d	100	68	1	4	1	2	2	1
69	ENQ	05	e	101	69	1	1	2	2	1	4
70	ACK	06	f	102	70	1	1	2	4	1	2
71	BEL	07	g	103	71	1	2	2	1	1	4
72	BS	08	h	104	72	1	2	2	4	1	1
73	HT	09	i	105	73	1	4	2	1	1	2
74	LF	10	j	106	74	1	4	2	2	1	1
75	VT	11	k	107	75	2	4	1	2	1	1
76	FF	12	l	108	76	2	2	1	1	1	4
77	CR	13	m	109	77	4	1	3	1	1	1
78	SO	14	n	110	78	2	4	1	1	1	2
79	SI	15	o	111	79	1	3	4	1	1	1
80	DLE	16	p	112	80	1	1	1	2	4	2
81	DC1	17	q	113	81	1	2	1	1	4	2
82	DC2	18	r	114	82	1	2	1	2	4	1
83	DC3	19	s	115	83	1	1	4	2	1	2
84	DC4	20	t	116	84	1	2	4	1	1	2
85	NAK	21	u	117	85	1	2	4	2	1	1
86	SYN	22	v	118	86	4	1	1	2	1	2
87	ETB	23	w	119	87	4	2	1	1	1	2
88	CAN	24	x	120	88	4	2	1	2	1	1
89	EM	25	y	121	89	2	1	2	1	4	1
90	SUB	26	z	122	90	2	1	4	1	2	1
91	ESC	27	{	123	91	4	1	2	1	2	1
92	FS	28	\|	124	92	1	1	1	1	4	3
93	GS	29	}	125	93	1	1	1	3	4	1
94	RS	30	~	126	94	1	3	1	1	4	1
95	US	31	DEL	127	95	1	1	4	1	1	3
96	FNC3	FNC3	96	1	1	4	3	1	1
97	FNC2	FNC2	97	4	1	1	1	1	3
98	SHIFT	SHIFT	98	4	1	1	3	1	1
99	CODE C	CODE C	99	1	1	3	1	4	1

Symbol character value	Code set A	ASCII	Code set B	ASCII	Code set C	Element widths (Modules)	Element pattern
value	value
for	for
code	code
set A	set B
B	S	B	S	B	S	1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8	9	10	11
100	CODE B	FNC4	CODE B	1	1	4	1	3	1
101	FNC4	CODE A	CODE A	3	1	1	1	4	1
102	FNC1	FNC1	FNC1	4	1	1	1	3	1
103	Start A	2	1	1	4	1	2
104	Start B	2	1	1	2	1	4
105	Start C	2	1	1	2	3	2

Symbol	Code set A	Code set B	Code set C	Element widths (Modules)	Element pattern
character
values
Stop	B	S	B	S	B	S	B	1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8	9	10	11	12	13
2	3	3	1	1	1	2

Note: The stop character comprises 13 modules in four bars (dark bars) and three spaces (light bars). Every other character comprises 11 modules, starts with a bar (dark bar), ends with a space (light bar) and comprises six elements, each of which varies from one to four modules in width. The numeric values in the B and S columns represent the number of modules in each bar (dark bar) or space (light bar) element respectively in the symbol characters.

5.4.3.3 Code sets

This section contains information on code sets.

5.4.3.3.1 Code set A

Code set A includes all of the standard upper case alphanumeric characters and punctuation characters together with the symbology elements (e.g., characters with ASCII values from 00 to 95) and seven special characters.

5.4.3.3.2 Code set B

Code set B includes all of the standard upper case alphanumeric characters and punctuation characters together with the lowercase alphabetic characters (e.g., ASCII characters 32 to 127 inclusive) and seven special characters.

5.4.3.3.3 Code set C

Code set C includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 to 99 inclusive, as well as three special characters. This allows numeric data to be encoded as two data digits per symbol character.

5.4.3.4 Special characters

The last seven characters of code sets A and B (character values 96 to 102) and the last three characters of code set C (character values 100 to 102) are special non-data characters that, though they have particular significance to the barcode reader, have no ASCII character equivalents.

5.4.3.4.1 Code set and shift characters

Code set and shift characters SHALL be used to change from one code set to another within a symbol. The decoder SHALL NOT transmit them. Code set characters: Code A, B, or C characters change the symbol code set from the code set

previously defined to the new code set, which is defined by the code character. This change applies to all characters following the code set character until either the end of the symbol, another code set character, or the shift character is encountered. Shift character: The shift character changes the code set from A to B or B to A for the single
character following the shift character. Characters following the affected character SHALL revert to the code set A or B defined prior to the shift character.

5.4.3.4.2 Function characters

Function characters (FNC) provide special operations and application instructions to the barcode reading device. The Function 1 Symbol Character (FNC1) SHALL be subject to the special considerations defined

in section 5.4.3.6. An FNC1 in the first position following the start character of a Code-128 symbol is at all times a reserved use, which identifies the GS1 system. The Function 2 Character (FNC2) (Message Append) is not used in the GS1 system. It instructs
the barcode reader to temporarily store the data from the symbol containing the FNC2 and transmit it as a prefix to the data of the next symbol. This may be used to concatenate several symbols before transmission. This character may occur anywhere in the symbol. Where the sequence of data is significant, provision should be made to ensure reading of the symbols in the correct sequence.

The Function 3 Character (FNC3) (Initialise) instructs the barcode reader to interpret the data

from the symbol containing the FNC3 as instructions for initialisation or reprogramming of the barcode reader. The data from the symbol SHALL NOT be transmitted by the barcode reader. This character may occur anywhere in the symbol. The Function 4 Character (FNC4) is not used in the GS1 system. In Code 128 symbols, FNC4 is
used to represent an extended ASCII character set (byte values 128 to 255) as specified in ISO

8859-1: Information technology; 8-bit single-byte coded graphical character sets; Part 1: Latin alphabet No.1, or otherwise in an application specification. If a single FNC4 is used, the value 128 is added to the ASCII value of the following data character in the symbol. A shift character may follow the FNC4 if it is necessary to change the code set for the following data character.

Subsequent data characters revert to the standard ASCII set. If two consecutive FNC4s are used, the value 128 is added to the ASCII value of the following data characters until two further consecutive FNC4s are encountered or the end of the symbol is reached. If, during this sequence of extended ASCII encodation, a single FNC4 is encountered, it is used to revert to standard ASCII encodation for the next data character only. Shift and code set characters SHALL have their normal effect during such a sequence. The default reference character set for extended ASCII values 128 to 255 is the corresponding half of ISO 8859-1, Latin alphabet 1, but application specifications may define or reference alternative sets corresponding to byte values 128 to 255.

5.4.3.5 Start and stop characters

Start characters A, B and C define the corresponding code set to be used initially in the symbol.

The stop character is common to all code sets.
The decoder SHALL NOT transmit start and stop characters.

5.4.3.6 Symbol check character

The symbol check character SHALL be included as the last symbol character before the stop character. Section 5.4.7.5.1 defines the algorithm for its calculation. The symbol check character SHALL NOT be represented in the human readable interpretation nor SHALL it be transmitted by the decoder.

5.4.3.7 GS1-128 symbology start pattern

The GS1-128 symbology has special double character start patterns consisting of start (A, B, or C) and FNC1. These special start characters differentiate GS1-128 barcodes from the more generalised Code 128 symbols.

In other words, a Code 128 symbol, which begins with one of the GS1-128 symbology double character start patterns, is always a GS1-128 barcode; a Code 128 symbol, which does not begin with this start pattern, is never a GS1-128 barcode.

A Function 1 Symbol Character (FNC1) may be the symbol check character (in less than 1 percent of cases). It is also used as a separator character, when appropriate, if element strings are concatenated into a single barcode.

Start A begins the GS1-128 symbol data encodation according to character set A.

Start B begins the GS1-128 symbol data encodation according to character set B.
Start C begins the GS1-128 symbol data encodation according to character set C. Start character C

SHOULD always be used when the data inclusive of the AI begins with four or more numeric characters.

5.4.3.8 Relationship of symbol character value to ASCII value (informative)

In order to convert symbol character value (S) to ASCII decimal value or vice versa, the following relationships are applicable for code set A and code set B. Code set A

If: S ≤ 63

Then: ASCII value = S + 32 If: 64 ≤ S ≤ 95 Then: ASCII value = S - 64 Code set B

If: S ≤ 95,

Then: ASCII value = S + 32 The resulting values are shown in Table 5-25. Note: As described in section 5.4.3, the Function 4 Character (FNC4) is not used in the GS1 system. However, the presence of FNC4 in Code 128 symbols has the effect of adding 128 to the ASCII value of the subsequent data character or characters derived from the rules given above.

5.4.4 Dimensional requirements

GS1-128 barcodes SHALL conform to the dimensions in the subsections that follow.

5.4.4.1 Minimum width of a module (X-dimension)

The minimum X-dimension is defined by the application specification and requirements (see section 5.12), while considering the equipment available for symbol production and scanning. Application specifications stipulate a target and minimum and maximum width of the X-dimension, see the symbol specifications in section 5.12.3 The X-dimension SHALL be constant throughout a given symbol.

5.4.4.2 Quiet Zone

The minimum width of the Quiet Zone to the left and right of the GS1-128 barcode is 10x.

5.4.4.3 Maximum symbol length

The maximum length of any GS1-128 barcode must be within the following limits: The length, including Quiet Zones, cannot exceed 165.10 millimetres (6.500 inches).

The number of encoded data characters SHALL NOT exceed 48. Data characters include GS1
Application Identifier(s) and the Function 1 Symbol Character (FNC1) when used as a separator character. The start, leading Function 1, symbol check and stop characters are not data characters. The total number of transmitted data characters following the symbology identifier SHALL NOT exceed 48.

5.4.5 Reference decode algorithm

The algorithm contains the following steps to decode each character: Calculate eight width measurements p, e1, e2, e3, e4, b1, b2 and b3 (see figure below).

b1 b2 b3

───────>

e1 e3 <───────────────> <───────────────> e2 e4 <───────────────> <────────────────────> p <──────────────────────────────────────────────────>

Figure 5-38 Decode measurements

Convert measurements e1, e2, e3 and e4 to normalised values E1, E2, E3 and E4, which will

represent the integral module width (Ei) of these measurements. The following method is used for the i-th value: If 1,5p/11 ≤ ei < 2,5p/11, then Ei = 2
If 2,5p/11 ≤ ei < 3,5p/11, then Ei = 3
If 3,5p/11 ≤ ei < 4,5p/11, then Ei = 4
If 4,5p/11 ≤ ei < 5,5p/11, then Ei = 5
If 5,5p/11 ≤ ei < 6,5p/11, then Ei = 6
If 6,5p/11 ≤ ei < 7,5p/11, then Ei = 7
Otherwise the character is in error.

Look up the character in the decode table using the four values E1, E2, E3 and E4 as the key

(see Table 5-26).

Retrieve the self-checking symbol character value V, which is stored in the table with the

character. The value V is equal to the sum of the modules for the bars (dark bars) as defined for that character. Verify that:
(V-1, 75)p / 11 < (b1 + b2 + b3) < (V + 1, 75)p / 11

Otherwise the character is in error. The calculation indirectly uses character parity to detect all decode errors caused by single non- systematic one-module edge errors. Using these five steps, decode the first character. If it is a start character, continue decoding the symbol in the normal forward direction. If it is not a start character but decodes as a stop character, attempt to decode all subsequent characters in the reverse direction.

After all characters have been decoded, make sure there is a valid start character, a valid stop character and that the symbol check character is correct. Translate the symbol characters into the appropriate data characters from code set A, B, or C according to the start character, code characters and shift characters used in the symbol.

In addition, perform other secondary checks on Quiet Zones, beam acceleration, absolute timing and dimensions that are appropriate considering the specific reading device and intended application environment.

Note: In this algorithm the symbol is decoded using edge to similar edge measurements (e) and an additional measurement of the sum of the three bar (dark bar) widths.

Table 5-26 Edge differences for decoding code 128 symbols

	Char.	E1	E2	E3	E4	V		Char.	E1	E2	E3	E4	V
	value							value
00		3	3	4	4	6	54		4	2	2	3	6
01		4	4	3	3	6	55		4	2	4	5	6
02		4	4	4	4	6	56		6	4	2	3	6
03		3	3	3	4	4	57		4	3	3	2	6
04		3	3	4	5	4	58		4	3	5	4	6
05		4	4	3	4	4	59		6	5	3	2	6
06		3	4	4	3	4	60		4	5	5	2	8
07		3	4	5	4	4	61		4	3	5	5	4
08		4	5	4	3	4	62		7	4	2	2	6
09		4	3	3	3	4	63		2	2	3	4	4
10		4	3	4	4	4	64		2	2	5	6	4
11		5	4	3	3	4	65		3	3	2	3	4
12		2	3	4	5	6	66		3	3	5	6	4
13		3	4	3	4	6	67		5	5	2	3	4
14		3	4	4	5	6	68		5	5	3	4	4
15		2	4	5	4	6	69		2	3	4	3	4
16		3	5	4	3	6	70		2	3	6	5	4
17		3	5	5	4	6	71		3	4	3	2	4
18		4	5	5	3	6	72		3	4	6	5	4
19		4	3	2	4	6	73		5	6	3	2	4
20		4	3	3	5	6	74		5	6	4	3	4
21		3	4	5	3	6	75		6	5	3	3	4
22		4	5	4	2	6	76		4	3	2	2	4
23		4	3	3	4	8	77		5	4	4	2	8
24		4	2	3	4	6	78		6	5	2	2	4
25		5	3	2	3	6	79		4	7	5	2	6
26		5	3	3	4	6	80		2	2	3	6	6
27		4	3	4	3	6	81		3	3	2	5	6
28		5	4	3	2	6	82		3	3	3	6	6
29		5	4	4	3	6	83		2	5	6	3	6
30		3	3	3	3	6	84		3	6	5	2	6
31		3	3	5	5	6	85		3	6	6	3	6
32		5	5	3	3	6	86		5	2	3	3	6
33		2	2	4	5	4	87		6	3	2	2	6
34		4	4	2	3	4	88		6	3	3	3	6
35		4	4	4	5	4	89		3	3	3	5	8
36		2	3	5	4	4	90		3	5	5	3	8
37		4	5	3	2	4	91		5	3	3	3	8
38		4	5	5	4	4	92		2	2	2	5	6
39		3	2	4	4	4	93		2	2	4	7	6
40		5	4	2	2	4	94		4	4	2	5	6
41		5	4	4	4	4	95		2	5	5	2	6

Char.	E1	E2	E3	E4	V	Char.	E1	E2	E3	E4	V
value	value
42	2	3	3	4	6	96	2	5	7	4	6
43	2	3	5	6	6	97	5	2	2	2	6
44	4	5	3	4	6	98	5	2	4	4	6
45	2	4	4	3	6	99	2	4	4	5	8
46	2	4	6	5	6	100	2	5	5	4	8
47	4	6	4	3	6	101	4	2	2	5	8
48	4	4	4	3	8	102	5	2	2	4	8
49	3	2	4	6	6	103	3	2	5	5	4
50	5	4	2	4	6	104	3	2	3	3	4
51	3	4	4	2	6	105	3	2	3	5	6
52	3	4	6	4	6	StopA	5	6	4	2	6
53	3	4	4	4	8	StopB	3	2	2	4	6

Note: StopA values are for decoding in a forward direction. StopB values apply to the first six elements of the stop character starting at the rightmost side when scanned in a reverse direction.

5.4.6 Symbol quality

5.4.6.1 General

ISO/IEC 15416 defines a standardised methodology for measuring and grading barcodes. Code 128 symbols SHALL be evaluated according to that standard. The reference decode algorithm defined in section 5.3.2.3 SHALL be used for the assessment of the decode and decodability parameters under ISO/IEC 15416.

Note: For GS1-128 barcode minimum quality levels, refer to section 5.4.7.

5.4.6.2 Decodability

Decodability is a measure of how closely the decode algorithm measurement values approach those in a theoretically perfect symbol. Thus, decodability is a parameter that measures how closely the Scan Reflectance Profile is to approaching decode failure for a given printed symbol.

For the calculation of the decodability value V, the following provisions apply, which supplement those described in ISO/IEC 15416 for edge to similar edge decodable symbologies: Substitute V1 for VC in the formula VC = K / (S / 2n) K = the smallest difference between a measurement and a reference threshold.

Where: N = 11 (number of modules in a symbol character). S = total width of the character. Calculate V2 1,75 −൭ABS ቆቀWb x 11 S ቁ- Mቇ൱ 𝑉𝑉2 = 1,75 M = number of dark modules in the character.

Where: S = total width of the character. Wb = sum of the bar (dark bar) widths in the character. ABS = mathematical term for taking the absolute of the calculation that follows. VC is the lesser of V1 and V2.

The stop character includes an additional terminating bar (dark bar). For the purpose of measuring decodability, the stop character SHOULD be checked twice: first using the six leftmost elements and then using the six rightmost elements from right to left. Both sets of six elements are equivalent in width to a standard character.

5.4.6.3 Quiet Zone measurement

The Quiet Zones to the right and left of the GS1-128 barcode are compulsory. Both Quiet Zones have a minimum width of 10x. ISO/IEC 15416 allows for additional pass/fail criteria to be stipulated by a symbology specification.

In the case of a GS1-128 barcode, a minimum Quiet Zone of 10Z is specified. Both left and right Quiet Zones on each Scan Reflectance Profile (SRP) under ISO/IEC 15416 SHALL be measured and graded as follows:

Quiet Zone ≥ 10Z: Grade 4 (A). Quiet Zone < 10Z: Grade 0 (F). Where Z = the average measured width of the narrow bars (dark bars) and spaces (light bars) (one module) in the symbol.

5.4.6.4 Transmitted data

Transmitted data from a decoded GS1-128 barcode SHALL comprise the byte values of the data characters. It is prefixed by the symbology identifier ]C1, if used. The start and stop characters, function characters, code set and shift characters and symbol check character SHALL NOT be included in the transmitted data.

Note: For GS1-128 symbology implementation, see section 5.4.7.

5.4.7 GS1-128 symbology application parameters

5.4.7.1 Symbol height

The symbol height of a GS1-128 symbol depends on the specific application requirements. Please see section 5.12.3 for minimum symbol height specifications.

5.4.7.2 Symbol length

The dimensions of the GS1-128 barcode depend on the number of characters encoded: 1 start character x 11 modules = 11 Function 1 Symbol Character (FNC1) x 11 modules = 11 1 symbol check character x 11 modules = 11 1 stop character x 13 modules = 13 N symbol characters x 11 modules = 11N (11N + 46) modules Where N is the number of symbol characters, any auxiliary characters (shift and code characters) embedded in the data are included.

A module is equal to the X-dimension of the symbol. Character set C allows two digits to be encoded in one symbol character. Thus, numeric data can be encoded with twice the density of other data when using character set C.

In addition, Quiet Zones to the right and left of the barcode are compulsory and both have widths of 10 modules. Thus total symbol length, including Quiet Zones, is: (11N + 66) modules = (11N + 66) X Please see section 5.4.4.3 for maximum symbol length specifications.

5.4.7.3 Human readable interpretation

For human readable interpretation rules see section 4.14. For HRI rules specific to regulated healthcare retail consumer trade items, see section 4.14.1.

5.4.7.4 Transmitted data (FNC1)

The following GS1-128 symbology implementation specifications are in accordance with ISO/IEC 15417 Appendix 2 for transmitted data: The Function 1 Symbol Character (FNC1) may validly occur as the symbol check character.

FNC1 in the third or subsequent character position is transmitted as the control character (ASCII
value 29 (decimal), 1D (hexadecimal)).

For symbols using FNC1 in the first data position scanners SHOULD have symbology identifiers

enabled.

When FNC1 is used in the first position, it SHALL NOT be represented in the transmitted message, although its presence is indicated by the use of modifier value 1 in the symbology identifier.

5.4.7.5 Additional features of GS1-128 (normative)

5.4.7.5.1 Symbol check character

The GS1-128 symbol check character SHALL be calculated according to the following rules. 1. Retrieve the symbol character value from Table 5-27. 2. Each symbol character position is given a weight. The start character is weighted 1. Then, beginning on the left with the first symbol character following the start character, the weights are 1, 2, 3 and 4 to...n for all subsequent symbol characters up to, but not including, the symbol check character itself; n denotes the number of symbol characters representing data or special information in the symbol, exclusive of the start and stop characters and symbol check character.

Note: Both the start character and the first symbol character following the start character (the Function 1 Symbol Character (FNC1) for all GS1-128 barcodes) are weighted by one. 3. Each symbol character value is multiplied by its weight.

The products of the calculations in step 3 are totalled. 5. The sum of the products is divided by 103. 6. The remainder derived from the calculation in step 5 is the symbol character value of the symbol check character.

Table 5-27 shows how to calculate the symbol check character value for the batch number 2503X using the GS1-128 barcode.

Table 5-27 Symbol check character value calculation example

Start C FNC1 10(*) 25 03 Code B X [symbol check character] Stop

Characters	Start C	FNC1	10	25	03	Code B	X
Character values (Step 1)	105 102 10 25 3 100 56 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 105 102 20 75 12 500 336 1150 1150 / 103 = 11 17
Weights (Step 2)
Products (Step 3)
Sum of products (Step 4)
Divide by 103 (Step 5)
Remainder = symbol check
character value

(*) GS1 Application Identifier (10) is defined as batch or lot number. The symbol check character SHALL be positioned immediately after the final data character and before the stop character.

Note: The symbol check character SHALL NOT be shown in the human readable interpretation.

5.4.7.6 Recommended use of symbol characters to minimise GS1-128 symbol length

(informative) The same data may be represented in different GS1-128 barcodes through the use of different combinations of Start A, Start B, Start C, FNC1, Code A, Code B, Code C and Shift characters.

The following steps may be implemented in printer control software to minimise the number of symbol characters needed to represent a given data string (and, therefore, reduce the overall symbol length).

Begin with characters Start C and FNC1. 2. If the data begins with an odd number of digits, insert a Code B character before the last digit. 3. If in a code set B there are four or more consecutive digits and:

a. If there is an even number of digits, insert a Code C character before the first digit to change to code set C. b. If there is an uneven number of digits, insert a Code C character immediately after the first digit to change to code set C.

When in code set C and a non-numeric character occurs in the data, insert a Code B character before that character. Note: Code set A may still be used to create GS1-128 barcodes but it encodes fewer data character options than code set B. Code set C encodes a pair of digits as one symbol character so it is more space efficient when encoding four or more consecutive digits. There is no need to use code set A to encode as a separator character because FNC1 may be used for this purpose.

5.4.7.7 Guidelines for the use of Code 128 (informative)

5.4.7.7.1 Autodiscrimination compatibility

Code 128 symbols may be read by suitably programmed barcode readers that have been designed to autodiscriminate these symbols from other symbologies. Code 128 symbology is fully distinguishable from and compatible with the following linear symbologies:

ITF (Interleaved 2 of 5)

Codabar
Code 39
Code 93
EAN/UPC
Telepen
GS1 DataBar

5.5 Linear barcodes - GS1 DataBar

5.5.1 Introduction

GS1 DataBar is a family of linear symbologies used within the GS1 system. There are three types of GS1 DataBar symbols, two of which have a number of variations optimised for different application requirements.

The first type has four variations (GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar Stacked and GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional) and encodes AI (01) in a linear symbol.

The second type comprises only one variation namely GS1 DataBar Limited which encodes AI (01) in a linear symbol for use on small items that will not be scanned in an omnidirectional scanning environment. The third type has two variations; a single row variation (GS1 DataBar Expanded) and a multi-row stacked variation (GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked). Both variations encode GS1 system primary item identification plus supplementary AI element strings, such as weight and “best before” date, in a linear symbol that can be scanned omnidirectionally by suitably programmed slot scanners.

GS1 DataBar Stacked is a variation of the first type of GS1 DataBar symbology that is stacked in two rows and used when the normal symbol would be too wide for the application. It comes in two variations: a truncated variation used for small item marking applications and a taller variation that is designed to be read by omnidirectional scanners. GS1 DataBar Expanded can also be printed in multiple rows as a stacked symbol.

Any member of the GS1 DataBar family can be printed as a stand-alone linear symbol or as a component of a composite symbol with an accompanying two-dimensional (2D) Composite Component printed above the GS1 DataBar linear component.

The GS1 DataBar family is fully described in ISO/IEC 24724.

5.5.1.1 Symbology characteristics

The GS1 DataBar family consists of the following variations: GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional

GS1 DataBar Truncated
GS1 DataBar Stacked
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Limited
GS1 DataBar Expanded
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
The characteristics of the GS1 DataBar family are:

Encodable character set:

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar
Stacked Omnidirectional and GS1 DataBar Limited: Digits 0 through 9 (with the restriction of GS1 DataBar Limited to 0 or 1 in the first digit) in accordance with ISO/IEC 646. Refer to Table 7-20 for more details.

GS1 DataBar Expanded variations: The GS1 system requires that only the subset of ISO/IEC

646 International Reference Version defined in these GS1 General Specifications be used for GS1 Application Identifier (AI) element strings. Refer to Table 7-20 for the allowed encodable character set.
Symbol character structure: Different (n,k) symbol characters are used for each member of the family, where each symbol character is n modules in width and is composed of k bars and k spaces.
Code type: Continuous, linear barcode symbology.
Maximum numeric data capacity (including implied GS1 Application Identifiers (AIs) where appropriate, but not including any encoded FNC1 characters): All GS1 DataBar symbols except the expanded versions: AI (01) plus a 14-digit numeric
item identification.

GS1 DataBar Expanded variations: 74 numeric or 41 alphabetic characters.

Error detection:

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar Stacked and GS1

DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional: mod 79 checksum.

GS1 DataBar Limited: mod 89 checksum.

GS1 DataBar Expanded variations: mod 211 checksum.
Character self-checking.
Bidirectionally decodable.
Quiet Zones: None required.

5.5.1.2 Additional features

Additional GS1 DataBar features include: Data compaction: Each member of the GS1 DataBar family has data compaction methods

optimised for the data strings that it will encode. GS1 DataBar Expanded variations are also optimised for specific sequences of GS1 Application Identifiers (AIs) that are commonly used. Component linkage: All GS1 DataBar symbols include a linkage flag. If the linkage flag is 0, then
the GS1 DataBar symbol stands alone. If the linkage flag is 1, then a 2D Composite Component and its separator pattern are printed above the GS1 DataBar symbol with the separator pattern aligned and contiguous to the GS1 DataBar symbol. Edge to similar edge decoding: All GS1 DataBar family symbol characters, finder patterns and
symbol check characters can be decoded using edge-to-edge measurements.

Large symbol characters: Unlike EAN/UPC symbols, a GS1 DataBar symbol’s symbol characters

do not directly correspond to the encoded data character. The symbol’s symbol characters encode thousands of possible combinations to increase the encoding efficiency. They are then combined mathematically to form the encoded data string. GS1-128 symbol emulation: Readers set to the GS1-128 symbol emulation mode transmit the
data encoded within a GS1 DataBar symbol as if the data were encoded in one or more GS1-128 symbols.

5.5.2 Symbol structure

5.5.2.1 The first group of GS1 DataBar symbols

The first group of GS1 DataBar symbols encodes the element string AI (01). It has four variations: GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar Stacked and GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional. All four variations encode data in an identical manner.

Figure 5-39 shows the structure of this group of GS1 DataBar symbols. These four different symbols, as explained below, contain four symbol characters and two finder patterns. The symbols are capable of being scanned in four separate segments, each consisting of a symbol character and an adjacent finder pattern. The two finder patterns together encode a modulo 79 check value for data security.

Figure 5-39 First group of GS1 DataBar symbols structure

The left and right guard bar patterns consist of a narrow space and narrow bar. These variations do not require a Quiet Zone.

5.5.2.1.1 GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional

The GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional barcode is designed to be read by an omnidirectional scanner, such as a retail slot scanner. Its dimensions are 96X wide, starting with a 1X space and ending with a 1X bar, by 33X high (where X is the width of a module). 33X is the minimum height of the symbol but the actual height of the symbol used depends on the specific application requirements. For example, a GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional symbol with an X-dimension of 0.254 millimetre (0.0100 inch) would be 24.38 millimetre (0.960 inch) wide and 8.38 millimetre (0.330 inch) high.

Figure 5-40 GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional barcode

5.5.2.1.2 GS1 DataBar Truncated

The GS1 DataBar Truncated barcode is a reduced height variation of the GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional barcode that is designed for small items that will not need to be read by omnidirectional scanners. Its dimensions are 96X wide by 13X high (where X is the width of a module). For example, a GS1 DataBar Truncated symbol with an X-dimension of 0.254 millimetre (0.0100 inch) would be 24.38 millimetres (0.960 inch) wide by 3.30 millimetres (0.130 inch) high.

(01)00012345678905

Figure 5-41 GS1 DataBar Truncated barcode

5.5.2.1.3 GS1 DataBar Stacked

The GS1 DataBar Stacked barcode is a reduced height two-row variation of the GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional barcode that is designed for small items that will not need to be read by omnidirectional scanners. Its dimensions are 50X wide by 13X high (where X is the width of a module). For example, a GS1 DataBar Stacked symbol with an X-dimension of 0.254 millimetre (0.0100 inch) would be 12.70 millimetres (0.500 inch) wide by 3.30 millimetres (0.130 inch) high. Its structure includes a 1X high separator pattern between the two rows.

(01)00012345678905

Figure 5-42 GS1 DataBar Stacked barcode

5.5.2.1.4 GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional

The GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional barcode is a full height, two-row variation of the GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional barcode that is designed to be read by an omnidirectional scanner, such as a retail slot scanner. Its dimensions are 50X wide by 69X high (where X is the width of a module). 69X is the minimum height of the symbol but the actual height of the symbol used depends on the specific application requirements. For example, a GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional symbol with an X- dimension of 0.254 millimetre (0.0100 inch) would be 12.70 millimetres (0.500 inch) wide by 17.53 millimetres (0.690 inch) high. The height of 69X includes a 3X high separator pattern between two rows of 33X each.

(01)00034567890125

Figure 5-43 GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional barcode

5.5.2.2 The second group of GS1 DataBar symbols: GS1 DataBar Limited

The GS1 DataBar Limited barcode is the second group of GS1 DataBar symbols. It encodes the element string AI (01). This element string is based on the GTIN-12, GTIN-13, or GTIN-14 data structures. However, when using the GTIN-14 data structure, only the indicator value 1 is allowed.

When encoding GTIN-14 data structures with an indicator value greater than 1, one of the first group of GS1 DataBar symbols must be used: see section 5.5.2.1. The GS1 DataBar Limited barcode is designed for small items that will not need to be read by omnidirectional point-of-sale (POS) scanners. Its dimensions are 79X wide, starting with a 1X space and ending with a 5X space, by 10X high (where X is the width of a module). For example, a GS1 DataBar Limited barcode with an X-dimension of 0.254 millimetre (0.0100 inch) would be 20.07millimetres (0.790 inches) wide by 2.54 millimetres (0.100 inch) high.

(01)15012345678907

Figure 5-44 GS1 DataBar Limited barcode

Figure 5-45 shows the structure of the GS1 DataBar Limited barcode. A GS1 DataBar Limited symbol contains two data characters and a symbol check character. The symbol check character encodes a modulo 89 check value for data security. (a) GS1 DataBar Limited symbol representing (01)00312345678906 (b) The same symbol on a dark background. Notice the trailing space in the right guard pattern

Figure 5-45 GS1 DataBar Limited barcode structure

The total symbol contains 47 elements comprising 79 modules. The minimum height SHALL be 10X. No Quiet Zones are required, however while each light module on both ends of the Limited symbol may look like a Quiet Zone, each differs from a Quiet Zone in that the reference decode algorithm must check for these guard bar patterns in order to avoid misreading a UPC-A symbol as a GS1 DataBar Limited symbol. The leading and trailing space elements may blend into the background of the symbol if that background is the same colour as the spaces in the symbol.

5.5.2.3 The third group of GS1 DataBar symbols: GS1 DataBar Expanded variations

GS1 DataBar Expanded variations are the third group of GS1 DataBar symbols and are a variable length linear symbology capable of encoding up to 74 numeric or 41 alphabetic characters of AI element string data. The two variations, GS1 DataBar Expanded and GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked are designed to encode primary and supplementary data on items for point-of-sale (POS) and other applications. They have the same capabilities as a GS1-128 symbol except that they are also designed to be scanned by omnidirectional slot scanners. They are designed for variable weight products, perishable products, traceable retail products and coupons.

Figure 5-46 shows the structure of a six-segment GS1 DataBar Expanded symbol. GS1 DataBar

Expanded symbols contain a symbol check character, 3 to 21 symbol characters and 2 to 11 finder patterns, depending on the symbol length. GS1 DataBar Expanded is capable of being scanned in separate segments, each segment consisting of a symbol character or symbol check character and the adjacent finder pattern. The symbol check character encodes a modulo 211 check value for data security.

Figure 5-46 GS1 DataBar Expanded structure

The left and right guard bar patterns consist of a narrow bar and narrow space. GS1 DataBar Expanded variations do not require a Quiet Zone.

5.5.2.3.1 GS1 DataBar Expanded

The GS1 DataBar Expanded barcode has a variable width (from 4 to 22 symbol characters, or a minimum of 102X wide and a maximum of 534X wide) and is 34X high (where X is the width of a module). The symbol starts with a 1X space and ends with either a 1X bar or space. For example, the GS1 DataBar Expanded Symbol shown in Figure 5-47 with an X-dimension of 0.254 millimetre (0.0100 inch) would be 38.35 millimetres (1.51 inches) wide by 8.64 millimetres (0.340 inch) high.

(01)90614141000015(3202)000150

Figure 5-47 GS1 DataBar Expanded barcode

5.5.2.3.2 GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked

The GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked barcode is a multi-row stacked variation of GS1 DataBar Expanded. It can be printed in widths of 2 to 20 segments and can have from 2 to 11 rows. Its structure includes a 3X high separator pattern between rows. It is designed to be read by an omnidirectional scanner such as a retail slot scanner. The GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked symbol shown in Figure 5-48 with an X-dimension of 0.254 millimetre (0.0100 inch) would be 25.91 millimetres (1.020 inches) wide by 18.03 millimetres (0.710 inch) high.

The white space at the end of the second row of the symbol shown in the figure below is not part of the symbol and can be used for other purposes, such as text. (01)90614141000015(3202)000150

Figure 5-48 GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked barcode

GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked is used when the symbol area or print mechanism is not wide enough to accommodate the full single-row GS1 DataBar Expanded symbol. It is designed for variable weight products, perishable products, traceable retail products and coupons.

5.5.2.3.3 Compressed element string sequences

While GS1 DataBar Expanded symbols can encode any sequence of GS1 Application Identifier (AI) data up to the maximum capacity of the symbol, certain sequences of AI element strings have been selected for special compression in GS1 DataBar Expanded variations. If the application requires the use of the AI element strings in one of these sequences and they are used in the predefined sequence, a smaller symbol will result.

The selected sequences are two types: fixed length, where the sequence of selected AI element strings is the only data encoded, and open-ended, where the sequence occurs at the start of the symbol’s data and other AI element strings may be added following the sequence. If the data to be encoded in a GS1 DataBar Expanded symbol starts with a sequence defined as fixed length but is followed by additional AI element strings, all the data will be encoded normally without special compression.

Fixed-length sequences This section contains information on fixed-length sequences. AI (01) and weight with limited range This sequence consists of the two GS1 Application Identifier (AI) element strings AI (01), followed by AI (3103), AI (3202), or AI (3203) for weight. The AI (01) element string must start with an indicator value of 9 for variable measure. Using AI (3103) (weight in grams), the special compression can only be applied up to a maximum weight of 32.767 kilograms. Using AI (3202) (weight in 0.01 pounds) the special compression can only be applied up to a maximum weight of 99.99 pounds. Using AI (3203) (weight in 0.001 pounds) the special compression can only be applied up to a maximum weight of 22.767 pounds. If the weight is in excess of these values, the sequence defined here still enables special compression to be performed.

AI (01): Weight and optional date This sequence consists of the two or three GS1 Application Identifier (AI) element strings AI (01), AI (310n), or (320n) for weight (n ranging from 0 to 9) and optionally AI (11), AI (13), AI (15), or AI (17) for date. The AI (01) element string must start with an indicator value of 9 for variable measure. If the date is not needed, this sequence still gives additional compression when the weight is outside the ranges required by the AI (01) and weight with limited range sequence above.

Open-ended sequences This section contains information on open-ended sequences. AI (01) and price This sequence consists of the two GS1 Application Identifier (AI) element strings, AI (01), followed by AI (392x) for price or AI (393x) for price with ISO currency code (where x is in the range of 0 to 3). The AI (01) element string must start with an indicator value of 9 for variable measure. For example, this sequence is used for an AI (01) element string, price and weight, because the fixed- length sequence AI (01) and weight does not give additional compression if the AI element string for price is added to the end since the length of the sequence is fixed.

AI (01) Any sequence that starts with GS1 Application Identifier (AI) (01) will have special compression applied to the AI (01). So when the data includes AI (01), it SHALL be the first element string encoded.

5.5.2.3.4 Maximum width and height of GS1 DataBar Expanded versions (informative)

Advice for maximum symbol size to optimise scanner performance Maximum symbol width (flat surface) For GS1 DataBar Expanded and GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked symbols scanned with an omnidirectional slot scanner, the following maximum symbol length is recommended: 158.75 mm (6.250 inch).

For GS1 DataBar Expanded and GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked symbols scanned with a presentation scanner, the following maximum symbol length is recommended: 158.75 mm (6.250 inch). For GS1 DataBar Expanded and GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked symbols scanned with a hand-held scanner, the following maximum symbol length is recommended as;

Hand-held Linear (Laser) Scanner: 158.75 mm (6.250 inch).

Hand-held Linear (CCD type) Scanner: 101.60 mm (4.000 inch).
Hand-held Imager (2D) Scanner: 158.75 mm (6.250 inch).
GS1 DataBar Expanded - Symbol Length vs. Symbol Characters

Table 5-28 GS1 DataBar symbol length specification (flat surface) Table 1

X [inch]	0.0080	0.010	0.0130	0.0260	0.0390
X [mm]	0.203	0.254	0.330	0.660	0.991
Characters
4	0.816	20.73	1.020	25.91	1.326	33.68	2.652	67.36	3.978	101.04
5	1.072	27.23	1.340	34.04	1.742	44.25	3.484	88.49	5.226	132.74
6	1.208	30.68	1.510	38.35	1.963	49.86	3.926	99.72	5.889	149.58
7	1.464	37.19	1.830	46.48	2.379	60.43	4.758	120.85	7.137	181.28
8	1.600	40.64	2.000	50.80	2.600	66.04	5.200	132.08	7.800	198.12
9	1.856	47.14	2.320	58.93	3.016	76.61	6.032	153.21	9.048	229.82
10	1.992	50.60	2.490	63.25	3.237	82.22	6.474	164.44	9.711	246.66
11	2.248	57.10	2.810	71.37	3.653	92.79	7.306	185.57	10.959	278.36
12	2.384	60.55	2.980	75.69	3.874	98.40	7.748	196.80	11.622	295.20
13	2.640	67.06	3.300	83.82	4.290	108.97	8.580	217.93	12.870	326.90
14	2.776	70.51	3.470	88.14	4.511	114.58	9.022	229.16	13.533	343.74
15	3.032	77.01	3.790	96.27	4.927	125.15	9.854	250.29	14.781	375.44
16	3.168	80.47	3.960	100.58	5.148	130.76	10.296	261.52	15.444	392.28
17	3.424	86.97	4.280	108.71	5.564	141.33	11.128	282.65	16.692	423.98
18	3.560	90.42	4.450	113.03	5.785	146.94	11.570	293.88	17.355	440.82
19	3.816	96.93	4.770	121.16	6.201	157.51	12.402	315.01	18.603	472.52
20	3.952	100.38	4.940	125.48	6.422	163.12	12.844	326.24	19.266	489.36
21	4.208	106.88	5.260	133.60	6.838	173.69	13.676	347.37	20.514	521.06
22	4.344	110.34	5.430	137.92	7.059	179.30	14.118	358.60	21.177	537.90

Best Performance
Not Recommended

Maximum symbol width (curved surface) For GS1 DataBar Expanded Variation symbols with a maximum subtended angle of 600 (see Figure 6-3 Relationship between symbol and curvature), Table 2 provides the length of a GS1 DataBar Expanded Variation symbol as a function of the X-dimension chosen. Tests show that GS1 DataBar Expanded Variations have decreased performance at the maximum angle and it is recommended that, when possible, these symbols be made such that a smaller angle is subtended.

Table 5-29 GS1 DataBar symbol length specification (curved surface) Table 2

Diameter (inch)	0.25	0.50	0.75	1.00	1.25	1.50	1.75	2.00	2.50	3.00
Lmax (inch)	0.131	0.262	0.393	0.524	0.654	0.785	0.916	1.047	1.309	1.571
Diameter (mm)	6.35	12.70	19.05	25.40	31.75	38.10	44.45	50.80	63.50	76.20
Lmax (mm)	3.32	6.65	9.97	13.30	16.62	19.95	23.27	26.60	33.25	39.90
Diameter (inch)	3.50	4.00	4.50	5.00	5.50	6.00	6.50	7.00	7.50	8.00
Lmax (inch)	1.833	2.094	2.356	2.618	2.880	3.142	3.456	3.665	3.927	4.189
Diameter (mm)	88.90	101.60	114.30	127.00	139.70	152.40	167.64	177.80	190.50	203.20
Lmax (mm)	46.55	53.20	59.85	66.50	73.15	79.80	87.78	93.10	99.75	106.40
Diameter (inch)	8.50	9.00	9.50	10.00	20.00	30.00	40.00	50.00	60.00
Lmax (inch)	4.451	4.712	4.974	5.236	10.472	15.708	20.944	26.180	31.42
Diameter (mm)	215.90	228.60	241.30	254.00	508.00	762.00	1016.00	1270.00	1524.00
Lmax (mm)	113.05	119.69	126.34	132.99	265.99	398.98	531.98	664.97	797.96
Diameter (inch)	0.25	0.50	0.75	1.00	1.25	1.50	1.75	2.00	2.50	3.00
Lmax (inch)	0.131	0.262	0.393	0.524	0.654	0.785	0.916	1.047	1.309	1.571
Diameter (mm)	6.35	12.70	19.05	25.40	31.75	38.10	44.45	50.80	63.50	76.20
Lmax (mm)	3.32	6.65	9.97	13.30	16.62	19.95	23.27	26.60	33.25	39.90
Diameter (inch)	3.50	4.00	4.50	5.00	5.50	6.00	6.50	7.00	7.50	8.00
Lmax (inch)	1.833	2.094	2.356	2.618	2.880	3.142	3.456	3.665	3.927	4.189
Diameter (mm)	88.90	101.60	114.30	127.00	139.70	152.40	167.64	177.80	190.50	203.20
Lmax (mm)	46.55	53.20	59.85	66.50	73.15	79.80	87.78	93.10	99.75	106.40
Diameter (inch)	8.50	9.00	9.50	10.00	20.00	30.00	40.00	50.00	60.00
Lmax (inch)	4.451	4.712	4.974	5.236	10.472	15.708	20.944	26.180	31.42
Diameter (mm)	215.90	228.60	241.30	254.00	508.00	762.00	1016.00	1270.00	1524.00
Lmax (mm)	113.05	119.69	126.34	132.99	265.99	398.98	531.98	664.97	797.96

Note: See Table 6-1 Relationship between diameter and the X-dimension. Maximum height GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked For GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked symbols, Table 3 provides the height of the symbol as a function of the number of rows and X-dimension chosen. Advice is provided, as a result of tests conducted, that indicate (shading of table cells) scanning performance as a function of the number of rows and X-dimension. It should be noted that the testing showed, independent of X-dimension, significant reduction in scanner performance, for symbols containing more than 7 rows.

Table 5-30 GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked height specification (informative) Table 3

Height of GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked by row [metric units]
X [mm]	0.203	0.254	0.330	0.381	0.508	0.660	0.762	0.889	0.991
Row	Height
(modules)
2	71	14.41	18.03	23.43	27.05	36.07	46.86	54.10	63.12	70.36
3	108	21.92	27.43	35.64	41.15	54.86	71.28	82.30	96.01	107.03
4	145	29.44	36.83	47.85	55.25	73.66	95.70	110.49	128.91	143.70
5	182	36.95	46.23	60.06	69.34	92.46	120.12	138.68	161.80	180.36
6	219	44.46	55.63	72.27	83.44	111.25	144.54	166.88	194.69	217.03

Height of GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked by row [metric units]
X [mm]	0.203	0.254	0.330	0.381	0.508	0.660	0.762	0.889	0.991
7	256	51.97	65.02	84.48	97.54	130.05	168.96	195.07	227.58	253.70
8	293	59.48	74.42	96.69	111.63	148.84	193.38	223.27	260.48	290.36
9	330	66.99	83.82	108.90	125.73	167.64	217.80	251.46	293.37	327.03
10	367	74.50	93.22	121.11	139.83	186.44	242.22	279.65	326.26	363.70
11	404	82.01	102.62	133.32	153.92	205.23	266.64	307.85	359.16	400.36

Height of GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked by row [imperial units]
X [inch]	0.0080	0.0100	0.0130	0.0150	0.0200	0.0260	0.0300	0.0350	0.0390
Row	Height
(modules)
2	71	0.568	0.710	0.923	1.065	1.420	1.846	2.130	2.485	2.769
3	108	0.864	1.080	1.404	1.620	2.160	2.808	3.240	3.780	4.212
4	145	1.160	1.450	1.885	2.175	2.900	3.770	4.350	5.075	5.655
5	182	1.456	1.820	2.366	2.730	3.640	4.732	5.460	6.370	7.098
6	219	1.752	2.190	2.847	3.285	4.380	5.694	6.570	7.665	8.541
7	256	2.048	2.560	3.328	3.840	5.120	6.656	7.680	8.960	9.984
8	293	2.344	2.930	3.809	4.395	5.860	7.618	8.790	10.255	11.427
9	330	2.640	3.300	4.290	4.950	6.600	8.580	9.900	11.550	12.870
10	367	2.936	3.670	4.771	5.505	7.340	9.542	11.010	12.845	14.313
11	404	3.232	4.040	5.252	6.060	8.080	10.504	12.120	14.140	15.756

Best Performance
Reduced Performance
Not Recommended

5.5.3 Human readable interpretation in GS1 DataBar symbols

For human readable interpretation rules see section 4.14. For HRI rules specific to regulated healthcare retail consumer trade items, see section 4.14.1.

5.5.4 Data transmission and symbology identifier prefixes

5.5.4.1 Default transmission mode

The GS1 system requires the use of symbology identifiers. GS1 DataBar family symbols are normally transmitted using symbology identifier prefix ]e0 (see section 5.1.3). For example, a GS1 DataBar symbol encoding AI (01) element string 10012345678902 produces the transmitted data string “]e00110012345678902.” Data transmission follows the rules for Encoding/Decoding element strings in GS1 symbologies using GS1 Application Identifiers (see section 7.8) If a 2D Composite Component accompanies a GS1 DataBar family linear symbol, the AI element string data from the 2D Composite Component immediately follows the linear component’s data.

However, readers have an option to transmit only the linear component data and ignore the 2D Composite Component.

5.5.4.2 GS1-128 symbol emulation mode

Readers also have an option for GS1-128 symbol emulation mode. This mode emulates the GS1-128 symbology for data transmission. This mode is used for applications programmed for GS1-128 but not yet programmed to recognise the symbology identifier prefix ]e0. The symbology identifier for GS1-128 emulation mode is ]C1. GS1 DataBar Expanded symbols that exceed 48 data characters are transmitted as two messages so as not to exceed the maximum GS1-128 symbol message length. Each of the two messages has a symbology identifier prefix of ]C1 and does not exceed 48 data characters. The two messages are split at a boundary between two element strings. This mode is inferior to the normal transmission mode as message integrity may be lost when a message is split.

5.5.5 Width of a module (X-dimension)

The range of the X-dimension will be defined by the application specification, having due regard to the availability of equipment for the production and reading of symbols and complying with the general requirements of the application. Symbol specifications are subject to change at the application standards level and are governed by the scanner operational environment decision tree in section 5.12.2.6.

The X-dimension SHALL be constant throughout a given symbol.

5.5.6 Height of symbol

The height of a symbol is a multiple of the X-dimension defined by the type of GS1 DataBar symbology given in sections 5.5.2.1.1, 5.5.2.1.2, 5.5.2.1.3, 5.5.2.1.4, 5.5.2.2, 5.5.2.3.1 and 5.5.2.3.2. Symbol specifications are subject to change at the application standards level and are governed by the scanner operational environment decision tree in section 5.12.2.6.

5.5.7 Print quality grade

The International Standard ISO/IEC 15416 methodology is used for measuring and grading the GS1 DataBar family of symbols. The ISO/IEC 15416 print quality specification is functionally identical to the older ANSI and CEN print quality specifications. The print quality grade is measured by verifiers that comply with the standard. The grade includes a grade level, measuring aperture and the wavelength of light used for the measurement.

Symbol specifications are subject to change at the application standards level and are governed by the scanner operational environment decision tree in section 5.12.2.6, For most applications, the minimum quality grade for GS1 DataBar symbols is:

1.5 / 06 / 660

Where 1.5 is the overall symbol quality grade.

06 is the measuring aperture reference number (corresponding to a 0.15 millimetre or 0.006
inch diameter aperture).

660 is the peak response wavelength in nanometres.

In addition to the minimum print quality grade, all elements in the row separator patterns SHOULD be visually distinguishable.

5.5.8 Advice for selecting the symbology

Any use of GS1 DataBar should comply with GS1 system global application guidelines. GS1 DataBar is not meant to replace other GS1 system symbologies. Existing applications that are satisfactorily utilising EAN/UPC symbols, ITF-14 symbols, or GS1-128 symbols should continue to use them.

Note: Scanning systems that need to read GS1 DataBar symbols must be appropriately programmed. If GS1 DataBar is used on items that will be read by omnidirectional slot scanners, then GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBar Expanded or GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked SHOULD be used. If only an AI (01) is to be encoded, then GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional or GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional SHOULD be used. The selection of one or the other depends on the aspect ratio of the area available for the symbol.

If supplementary GS1 Application Identifier (AI) element strings are required or the primary identification has an AI other than AI (01), then GS1 DataBar Expanded or GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked must be used. The selection of one or the other depends on the width of the print head or the area available for the symbol.

When using GS1 DataBar Expanded or GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked symbols to encode the Global Trade Item Number (GTIN), any required additional data SHOULD be included within the same symbol.

If GS1 DataBar is used on small items that do not need omnidirectional scanning capability, then GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar Limited, or GS1 DataBar Truncated SHOULD be used. GS1 DataBar Limited cannot be used to encode a GTIN-14 data structure with an indicator value greater than 1. Otherwise GS1 DataBar Truncated or GS1 DataBar Stacked must be used. GS1 DataBar Stacked is the smallest symbol; however, as the heights of both rows are very low, it is harder to scan and cannot be used with wand scanners. If space is available, GS1 DataBar Limited can be used for number structures that it can encode. Otherwise GS1 DataBar Truncated SHOULD be used for GTIN- 14 data structures with an indicator value greater than 1.

If the symbol is a GS1 DataBar Composite symbol, then using a wider GS1 DataBar symbol such as GS1 DataBar Truncated instead of GS1 DataBar Limited may be preferable because the wider companion 2D Composite Component may result in a GS1 DataBar Composite symbol of lower overall height even though the GS1 DataBar component itself is slightly taller.

If the data capacity in a two-column or three-column CC-B 2D Composite Component is inadequate to encode the required 2D component’s data message, then the linear component can be changed to increase the number of columns of the companion CC-B component. This will increase the maximum data capacity of the CC-B component as shown in the table below.

Table 5-31 Data capacity of CC-B

Number of CC-	Used with	Maximum numeric	Maximum alpha
B columns	characters	characters
2	GS1 DataBar Stacked GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional	95	55
3	GS1 DataBar Limited	219	127
4	GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional GS1 DataBar Expanded GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked	338	196

5.6 Two-dimensional barcodes - GS1 DataMatrix symbology

5.6.1 Introduction

This section of the GS1 General Specifications addresses some of the technical aspects of the two- dimensional barcode symbology called GS1 DataMatrix. GS1 DataMatrix is a standalone, two- dimensional barcode symbology that is made up of square modules arranged within a perimeter finder pattern. Unlike a Composite Component symbol (see section 5.11.1), GS1 DataMatrix does not require a linear symbol. GS1 DataMatrix has been used in the public domain since 1994.

This section provides only a brief technical description and overview of the GS1 DataMatrix symbology. A more detailed technical specification can be found in the International Standard ISO/IEC 16022. The GS1 system has adopted GS1 DataMatrix partly because, like GS1 QR Code, GS1 DataMatrix can encode GS1 system data structures and offers other technical advantages. Its compact design and the existence of various production methods that accommodate placing the symbology onto various substrates offer certain advantages over other symbologies currently in the GS1 system.

Data Matrix ISO version ECC 200 is the only version that supports GS1 system data structures, including Function 1 Symbol Character (FNC1). The ECC 200 version of Data Matrix uses Reed- Solomon error correction and this feature helps correct for partially damaged symbols. In the remainder of this section, the ECC 200 version of Data Matrix is assumed when the symbology is described as GS1 DataMatrix. This version of Data Matrix is similar in stability to ISO versions of current GS1 system symbologies.

Implementation of GS1 DataMatrix SHALL be done per approved GS1 system application guidelines. This section will not describe the specific applications. The user needs to refer to specific application standards and guidelines in other sections of these GS1 General Specifications as they are approved for use. However, some of the production processes that are used to produce GS1 DataMatrix symbols are as follows:

Direct part marking, such as is done by dot peening on items, such as automotive, aircraft metal

parts, medical instruments and surgical implants.

Laser or chemically etched parts with low contrast or light marked elements on a dark

background (e.g., circuit boards and electronic components, medical instruments, surgical implants). High-speed ink jet printed parts and components where the marked dots cannot form a
scannable linear symbol.

Very small items that require a symbology with a square aspect ratio and/or cannot be marked

within the allocated packaging space by existing GS1 DataBar and Composite symbols.

Use with B2C Extended Packaging applications.

GS1 DataMatrix symbols are read by two-dimensional imaging scanners or vision systems. Most other scanners that are not two-dimensional imagers cannot read GS1 DataMatrix. GS1 DataMatrix symbols are restricted for use with applications that will involve imaging scanners throughout the supply chain.

5.6.2 GS1 DataMatrix features and symbol basics

Figure 5-49 GS1 DataMatrix symbol

Figure 5-49 represents a GS1 DataMatrix symbol with 20 rows and 20 columns (including the

perimeter finder pattern but not including Quiet Zones).

GS1 DataMatrix solid “L” shaped finder or alignment pattern is one module wide.

GS1 DataMatrix Quiet Zone is one module wide on all four sides. As with other barcode Quiet
Zones, do not print in this area.

ECC 200 symbols can always be recognised from older versions of Data Matrix because the corner

opposite the middle of the finder pattern is a zero module or white in normal print.

For square GS1 DataMatrix symbols, only an even number of rows and columns exist.

Depending on data requirements, symbols can range from 10 row by 10 columns (10 x10) to 144x144 (including finder pattern but not the Quiet Zone). For normal printing, a module is one X by one X in dimension. Representation of data: A dark
module is a binary one and a light module is a binary zero (or a light module is a binary one and a dark module is a binary zero for a symbol with reflectance reversal). ECC 200 (ECC = Error Checking and Correction) that uses Reed-Solomon error correction. Table
5-32 ECC 200 Square Symbol attributes, shows the fixed amounts of error correction associated for each allowable Data Matrix symbol size. FNC1 for GS1 system compatibility SHALL be encoded at the beginning of the data string. When
a separator character is needed at the end of an element string, either the Function 1 Symbol

Character (FNC1) or the control character (ASCII value 29 (decimal), 1D (hexadecimal)) SHALL be used and SHALL be represented in the transmitted message by control character (ASCII value 29 (decimal), 1D (hexadecimal)).

Encodable character set:

The GS1 system requires that only the subset of ISO/IEC 646 International Reference
Version defined in these GS1 General Specifications be used for GS1 Application Identifier (AI) element strings. Refer to Table 7-20 for the allowed encodable character set. Data characters per symbol (for the maximum symbol size):
Alphanumeric data: up to 2335 characters.
Eight-bit byte data: 1556 characters.
Numeric data: 3116 digits.
Large, square ECC symbols (at least 32 X32) will include alignment patterns to separate the
data regions.

Code type: matrix (Composite Component is a stacked type).

Orientation independence: Yes (requires a two-dimensional imaging scanner).
Summary of additional features inherent or optional in GS1 DataMatrix:
Reflectance reversal: (Inherent) Symbols can be read when marked so that the image is
either dark on light or light on dark.

Rectangular symbols: Six symbol formats are specified in a rectangular form.

Extended Channel Interpretation (ECI) capability allows GS1 DataMatrix to encode data from
other alphabets.

5.6.3 GS1 DataMatrix symbology

The technical description of GS1 DataMatrix contained within this section provides additional information based on ISO technical specification 16022 and it is provided as a further aid in the development of specific applications. GS1 DataMatrix symbols shown in the following subsections have been magnified to show detail.

5.6.3.1 Square and rectangular formats

GS1 DataMatrix may be printed in a square or rectangular format. The square format is usually used as it has a larger range of sizes and is the only format available for symbols encoding a large amount of data. The largest rectangular symbol can encode 98 digits, while the largest square symbol can encode 3,116 digits. An enlarged rectangular symbol and an equivalent square symbol are shown in the figure below.

Figure 5-50 Rectangular and square GS1 DataMatrix symbols (Specific applications are not used in the data encodation. Both symbols contain the same data)

5.6.3.2 GS1 DataMatrix symbol sizes

GS1 DataMatrix symbology has multiple sizes to match various data content (see Table 5-32). GS1 DataMatrix symbols have 24 sizes of the square format ranging from 10 by 10 modules up to 144 by 144 modules, not including the 1-X surrounding Quiet Zone. The rectangular format has 6 sizes from 8 by 18 modules up to 16 by 48 modules, not including the 1-X surrounding Quiet Zone. GS1 DataMatrix sizes of 52 by 52 or larger have 2 to 10 interleaved blocks of Reed-Solomon error correction codewords.

The term “codeword” is used often to describe attributes concerning the encodation of data into GS1 DataMatrix symbols. ISO 16022 defines codeword as “A symbol character value. An intermediate level of coding between source data and the graphical encodation in the symbol.” Codewords are typically eight bits of data. FNC1, two numerics and one alpha all take up one codeword each.

Table 5-32 ECC 200 square symbol attributes (*)**

Symbol size		Data region		Mapping	Total		Reed-		Inter-	Data capacity			Error	Max. Correctable
(*)							Solomon		leaved
				Matrix	Codewords		Block			Num.	Alphanum.	Byte	Correction	Codeword
Row	Col	Size	No.	Size	Data	Error	Data	Error	Blocks	Cap.	Cap.	Cap.	Overhead %	Error/Erasure
10	10	8x8	1	8x8	3	5	3	5	1	6	3	1	62.5	2/0
12	12	10x10	1	10x10	5	7	5	7	1	10	6	3	58.3	3/0
14	14	12x12	1	12x12	8	10	8	10	1	16	10	6	55.6	5/7
16	16	14x14	1	14x14	12	12	12	12	1	24	16	10	50	6/9
18	18	16x16	1	16x16	18	14	18	14	1	36	25	16	43.8	7/11
20	20	18x18	1	18x18	22	18	22	18	1	44	31	20	45	9/15
22	22	20x20	1	20x20	30	20	30	20	1	60	43	28	40	10/17
24	24	22x22	1	22x22	36	24	36	24	1	72	52	34	40	12/21
26	26	24x24	1	24x24	44	28	44	28	1	88	64	42	38.9	14/25
32	32	14x14	4	28x28	62	36	62	36	1	124	91	60	36.7	18/33
36	36	16x16	4	32x32	86	42	86	42	1	172	127	84	32.8	21/39
40	40	18x18	4	36x36	114	48	114	48	1	228	169	112	29.6	24/45
44	44	20x20	4	40x40	144	56	144	56	1	288	214	142	28	28/53
48	48	22x22	4	44x44	174	68	174	68	1	348	259	172	28.1	34/65
52	52	24x24	4	48x48	204	84	102	42	2	408	304	202	29.2	42/78
64	64	14x14	16	56x56	280	112	140	56	2	560	418	277	28.6	56/106
72	72	16x16	16	64x64	368	144	92	36	4	736	550	365	28.1	72/132
80	80	18x18	16	72x72	456	192	114	48	4	912	682	453	29.6	96/180
88	88	20x20	16	80x80	576	224	144	56	4	1152	862	573	28	112/212
96	96	22x22	16	88x88	696	272	174	68	4	1392	1042	693	28.1	136/260
104	104	24x24	16	96x96	816	336	136	56	6	1632	1222	813	29.2	168/318
120	120	18x18	36	108x108	1050	408	175	68	6	2100	1573	1047	28	204/390
132	132	20x20	36	120x120	1304	496	163	62	8	2608	1954	1301	27.6	248/472
144	144	22x22	36	132x132	1558	620	156	62	8 (**)	3116	2335	1556	28.5	310/590
							155	62	2 (**)

Table 5-33 ECC 200 Rectangular symbol attributes (*)**

Symbol size (*)		Data region		Mapping	Total		Reed-Solomon		Inter-	Data capacity			Error	Max.
									leaved					Correctable
				Matrix	Codewords		Block			Num.	Alphanum.	Byte	Correction	Codeword
Row	Col	Size	No.	Size	Blocks	Cap.	Cap.	Cap.	Blocks	Cap.	Cap.	Cap.	Overhead %	Error/Erasure
8	18	6x16	1	6x16	5	7	5	7	1	10	6	3	58.3	3/+
8	32	6x14	2	6x28	10	11	10	11	1	20	13	8	52.4	5/+
12	26	10x24	1	10x24	16	14	16	14	1	32	22	14	46.7	7/11
12	36	10x16	2	10x32	22	18	22	18	1	44	31	20	45.0	9/15
16	36	14x16	2	14x32	32	24	32	24	1	64	46	30	42.9	12/21
16	48	14x22	2	14x44	49	28	49	28	1	98	72	47	36.4	14/25

(*) Symbol size does not include Quiet Zones. (**) In the largest symbol (144x144), the first eight Reed-Solomon blocks SHALL be 218 codewords long encoding 156 data codewords. The last two blocks SHALL encode 217 codewords (155 data codewords). All the blocks have 62 error correction codewords.

(***) Equivalent to Table 7 in the International Standard ISO-16022, second edition, 2006-09-15. The square format is divided into 4 to 36 data regions for symbols sized 32 by 32 modules and larger. The rectangular format symbols may also be divided into two data regions. Each data region is separated from the other regions by alignment patterns that consist of an alternating pattern of ones and zeroes and a solid line of ones (a dark line when there is no reflectance reversal). Figure 5-51 shows a four-segment square symbol on the left and a two-segment rectangular symbol on the right, each with hypothetical data shown to create the effect.

Figure 5-51 Segmented GS1 DataMatrix symbols: Square and rectangular formats (sizes of these GS1 DataMatrix symbols are larger than what would be used in a typical application so that typical alignment patterns can be easily seen.)

5.6.3.3 Data transmission and symbology identifier prefixes

The GS1 system requires the use of symbology identifiers. GS1 DataMatrix uses the symbology identifier of ]d2 (see Table 5-34) for GS1 system compliant symbols that have a leading FNC1 character. This indicates that GS1 Application Identifier (AI) data is encoded equivalent to the symbology identifier ]C1 for GS1-128 symbols and ]e0 for GS1 DataBar and Composite symbols.

For more information on symbology identifiers, see the International Standard ISO/IEC 15424 Information technology — Automatic identification and data capture techniques — Data Carrier Identifiers.

For example, a GS1 DataMatrix symbol encoding AI (01) element string 10012345678902 produces the transmitted data string “]d20110012345678902.” Data transmission follows the same principles that apply to the concatenation of AI element strings in any GS1 barcode that encodes GS1 Application Identifiers (see section 7.8).

Table 5-34 Symbology identifier for Data Matrix ECC 200

Message content	Separator
]d2	Standard AI element strings	None

5.6.3.4 Width and height of a module (X)

The range of the X-dimensions will be defined by the application specification, having due regard to the availability of equipment for the production and reading of symbols and complying with the general requirements of the application.

The X-dimension SHALL be constant throughout a given symbol. The X-dimension applies to both the width and height of the modules.

5.6.3.5 Symbol quality grade

The International Standard ISO/IEC 15415 Information technology - Automatic identification and data capture techniques – Bar code symbol print quality test specification - Two-dimensional symbols methodology SHALL be used for measuring and grading GS1 DataMatrix. The print quality grade is measured by verifiers that comply with the standard. The grade includes a grade level, measuring aperture, the wavelength of light used for the measurement and the illumination angle relative to the symbol.

A symbol grade is only meaningful if it is reported in conjunction with the illumination and aperture used. It is shown in the format grade/aperture/light/angle, where: "grade" is the overall symbol grade as defined in ISO/IEC 15415 Information technology -

Automatic identification and data capture techniques – Bar code symbol print quality test specification - Two-dimensional symbols (e.g., the arithmetic mean to one decimal place of the Scan Reflectance Profile or scan grades). For GS1 DataMatrix, the grade number may be followed by an asterisk (*) which indicates that the surroundings of the symbol contain extremes of reflectance that may interfere with reading. For most applications, this should be specified as causing the symbol to fail.

"aperture" is the diameter in thousandths of an inch (to the nearest thousandth) of the

synthetic aperture defined in ISO/IEC 15415 Information technology - Automatic identification and data capture techniques – Bar code symbol print quality test specification - Two- dimensional symbols. "light" defines the illumination: A numeric value indicates the peak light wavelength in
nanometres (for narrow band illumination); the alphabetic character W indicates that the symbol has been measured with broadband illumination (white light) the spectral response characteristics of which must imperatively be defined or have their source specification clearly referenced.

"angle" is an additional parameter defining the angle of incidence (relative to the plane of the

symbol) of the illumination. It SHALL be included in the reporting of the overall symbol grade when the angle of incidence is other than 45 degrees. Its absence indicates that the angle of incidence is 45 degrees. Note: This international standard provides for 30 degrees and 90 degrees illumination in addition to the default 45 degrees.

The aperture is normally specified as being 80% of the minimum X-dimension allowed for the application. The printing method must produce the GS1 DataMatrix "L" pattern with gaps between the dots less than 25% of the specified aperture. If symbols with greater than the minimum X dimension are allowed by the application, the same absolute maximum gap dimension must be maintained.

Examples: 2.8/05/660 would indicate that the average of the grades of the Scan Reflectance Profiles, or of

the scan grades, was 2.8 when these were obtained with the use of a 0.125 millimetre aperture (ref. No. 05) and a 660 nanometre light source, incident at 45 degrees. 2.8/10/W/30 would indicate the grade of a symbol intended to be read in broadband light,
measured with light incident at 30 degrees and using a 0.250 millimetre aperture (ref. No. 10), but would need to be accompanied either by a reference to the application specification defining the reference spectral characteristics used for measurement or a definition of the spectral characteristics themselves.

2.8/10/660* would indicate the grade of a symbol measured using a 0.250 millimetre aperture

(ref. No. 10), a 660 nanometre light source and indicates the presence of a potentially interfering extreme reflectance value in the surroundings of the symbol. Recommended symbol grades for GS1 DataMatrix are identified in individual applications in section 5.12.

5.6.3.6 Advice for selecting the symbology

Any use of GS1 DataMatrix should comply with GS1 system global application guidelines and be restricted to those applications defined by the GS1 system for GS1 DataMatrix. GS1 DataMatrix will not replace other GS1 system symbologies. Existing applications that are satisfactorily utilising EAN/UPC symbols, ITF-14 symbols, GS1-128 symbols, GS1 DataBar symbols, or Composite symbols should continue to use them.

When using GS1 DataMatrix symbols to encode the Global Trade Item Number (GTIN), any required additional data SHOULD be included within the same symbol. Note: Scanning systems that need to read GS1 DataMatrix symbols must be 2D imaging scanners and be appropriately programmed to read the GS1 system version of Data Matrix or ECC 200.

5.6.3.7 Human readable interpretation of GS1 DataMatrix symbols

For human readable interpretation rules see section 4.14. For HRI rules specific to regulated healthcare retail consumer trade items, see section 4.14.1.

5.7 Two-dimensional barcodes - GS1 QR Code symbology

5.7.1 Introduction

This section of the GS1 General Specifications addresses some of the technical aspects of the two- dimensional barcode symbology called GS1 QR Code. GS1 QR Code is a standalone, two- dimensional barcode symbology that is made up of square modules arranged in an overall square pattern, including a unique finder pattern located at three corners of the symbol. Unlike a Composite Component symbol (see section 5.11), GS1 QR Code does not require a linear symbol.

This section provides only a brief technical description and overview of the GS1 QR Code symbology. A more detailed technical specification can be found in ISO/IEC 18004:2015 Information technology -- Automatic identification and data capture techniques -- QR Code bar code symbology specification. ISO/IEC QR Code also contains specifications for Micro QR Code, but this symbology is not supported in the GS1 system.

The GS1 system has adopted GS1 QR Code partly because, like GS1 DataMatrix, GS1 QR Code can encode GS1 system data structures and offers other technical advantages. Its compact design and the existence of various production methods that accommodate placing the symbology onto various substrates offer certain advantages over other symbologies currently in the GS1 system.

QR Code supports all GS1 system data structures, including Function 1 Symbol Character (FNC1). QR Code uses Reed-Solomon error correction (four selectable levels of error correction are specified) and this feature helps correct for partially damaged symbols.

Implementation of GS1 QR Code SHALL be done per approved GS1 system application standards. This section will not describe the specific applications. The user needs to refer to specific application standards in other sections of these GS1 General Specifications as they are approved for use.

GS1 QR Code symbols are read by two-dimensional imaging scanners or vision systems. Most other scanners that are not two-dimensional imagers cannot read GS1 QR Code. GS1 QR Code symbols are restricted for use with applications that will involve imaging scanners throughout the supply chain.

5.7.2 GS1 QR Code features and symbol basics

GS1 QR Code is a subset of ISO/IEC QR Code that is a matrix symbology with the following characteristics: Formats QR Code, with full range of capabilities and maximum data capacity.

Not supported for the GS1 system: Micro QR Code, with reduced overhead, some restrictions on
capabilities and reduced data capacity.

Encodable character set numeric data: digits 0 - 9

alphabetic data: upper case letters A - Z
nine special characters: space $ % * + - . / :
Note: More information on how to encode the % special character can be found in ISO/IEC 18004:2015. byte data (default: ISO/IEC 8859-1; or other sets as otherwise defined in byte mode, data is
encoded at 8 bits per character. In closed-system national or application-specific implementations of QR Code, an alternative 8-bit character set, for example as defined in an appropriate part of ISO/IEC 8859, may be specified for byte mode. When an alternative character set is specified, however, the parties intending to read the QR Code symbols require to be notified of the applicable character set in the application specification or by bilateral agreement.

Not supported for the GS1 system: Kanji characters (Kanji characters in QR Code can be

compacted into 13 bits.

Representation of data A dark module is nominally a binary one and a light module is nominally a binary zero. However, reflectance reversal is provided as an option. Symbol size (not including Quiet Zone) GS1 QR Code symbols: 21 x 21 modules to 177 x 177 modules (Versions 1 to 40, increasing in steps of four modules per side).

Data characters per symbol maximum QR Code symbol size, Version 40-L:

numeric data: 7,089 characters.
alphanumeric data: 4,296 characters.
Byte data: 2,953 characters.
Kanji data: 1,817 characters (Not supported for the GS1 system).
Selectable error correction

Four levels of Reed-Solomon error correction (referred to as L, M, Q and H in increasing order of capacity) allowing recovery of: L 7% of the symbol codewords.

M 15% of the symbol codewords.
Q 25% of the symbol codewords.
H 30% of the symbol codewords.
Orientation independence both rotation and reflection
Figure 5-52 illustrates a QR Code symbol in normal colour and with reflectance reversal in both normal and mirror image orientations.

5.7.3 Summary of additional features

The use of the following additional features is optional in QR Code; some of these features are not supported for GS1 system use. Reflectance reversal Symbols are intended to be read when marked so that the image is either dark on light or light on dark (Figure 5-52). The specifications in this document are based on dark images on a light background, therefore in the case of symbols produced with reflectance reversal references to dark or light modules should be taken as references to light or dark modules respectively. See note below

Table 5-45 for more information.

Mirror imaging The arrangement of modules defined in this International Standard represents the "normal" orientation of the symbol. It is, however, possible to achieve a valid decode of a symbol in which the arrangement of the modules has been laterally transposed. When viewed with the finder patterns at the top left, top right and bottom left corners of the symbol, the effect of mirror imaging is to interchange the row and column positions of the modules. See note below Table 5-45 for more information.

normal orientation and reversed normal orientation and normal reflectance reflectance arrangement mirror image orientation and mirror image orientation and reversed normal reflectance arrangement reflectance

Figure 5-52 Examples of QR Code symbols

Not supported for the GS1 system: Structured append This allows files of data to be represented logically and continuously in up to 16 QR Code symbols. These may be scanned in any sequence to enable the original data to be correctly reconstructed.

Structured Append is not available with Micro QR Code symbols. Not supported for the GS1 system: Extended channel interpretations This mechanism enables data using character sets other than the default encodable set (e.g., Arabic, Cyrillic, Greek) and other data interpretations (e.g., compacted data using defined compression schemes) or other industry-specific requirements to be encoded.

5.7.4 GS1 QR Code symbology

The technical description of GS1 QR Code contained within this section provides additional information based on ISO/IEC technical standard 18004:2015 and it is provided as a further aid in the development of specific applications.

5.7.4.1 GS1 QR Code square format

GS1 QR Code is printed in a square format. The square format has a large range of sizes. The largest symbol (177 X 177 modules, Error Correction Level = L) can encode up to 7089 digits or 4296 alphanumeric characters technically, however permissible data is specified by the application standards.

5.7.4.2 GS1 QR Code symbol sizes

GS1 QR Code symbology has multiple sizes to match various data content (see Table 5-35). GS1 QR Code symbols have 40 sizes in a square format ranging from 21 by 21 modules up to 177 by 177 modules, not including the 4-X surrounding Quiet Zone.

The term “codeword” is used often to describe attributes concerning the encodation of data into GS1 QR Code. A codeword is defined as: “A symbol character value. An intermediate level of coding between source data and the graphical encodation in the symbol.” Codewords are typically eight bits of data.

Table 5-35 GS1 QR Code symbol size and data capacity

Version	Modules/	Data capacity	Version	Modules/	Data capacity
side	[codewords]	side	[codewords]
1	21	26	21	101	1 156
2	25	44	22	105	1 258
3	29	70	23	109	1 364
4	33	100	24	113	1 474
5	37	134	25	117	1 588
6	41	172	26	121	1 706
7	45	196	27	125	1 828
8	49	242	28	129	1 921
9	53	292	29	133	2 051
10	57	346	30	137	2 185
11	61	404	31	141	2 323
12	65	466	32	145	2 465
13	69	532	33	149	2 611
14	73	581	34	153	2 761
15	77	655	35	157	2 876
16	81	733	36	161	3 034
17	85	815	37	165	3 196
18	89	901	38	169	3 362
19	93	991	39	173	3 532
20	97	1 085	40	177	3 706

Note: Symbol size does not include surrounding 4-X Quiet Zones.

Table 5-36 GS1 QR Code symbol attributes for the first ten versions of the symbol

Version	Error correction level	Number of data codewords	Data capacity
			Numeric		Alpha-	Byte	Kanji
					numeric
1	L M Q H	19 16 13 9	41 34 27 17	25 20 16 10		17 14 11 7	10 8 7 4
2	L M Q H	34 28 22 16	77 63 48 34	47 38 29 20		32 26 20 14	20 16 12 8
3	L M Q H	55 44 34 26	127 101 77 58	77 61 47 35		53 42 32 24	32 26 20 15
4	L M Q H	80 64 48 36	187 149 111 82	114 90 67 50		78 62 46 34	48 38 28 21
5	L M Q H	108 86 62 46	255 202 144 106	154 122 87 64		106 84 60 44	65 52 37 27
6	L M Q H	136 108 76 60	322 255 178 139	195 154 108 84		134 106 74 58	82 65 45 36
7	L M Q H	156 24 88 66	370 293 207 154	224 178 125 93		154 122 86 64	95 75 53 39
8	L M Q H	194 154 110 86	461 365 259 202	279 221 157 122		192 152 108 84	118 93 66 52
9	L M Q H	232 182 132 100	552 432 312 235	335 262 189 143		230 180 130 98	141 111 80 60
10	L M Q H	274 216 154 122	652 513 364 288	395 311 221 174		271 213 151 119	167 131 93 74

5.7.4.3 Data transmission and symbology identifier prefixes

The GS1 system requires the use of symbology identifiers. GS1 QR Code uses the symbology identifier of ]Q3 (see Table 5-37) for GS1 system compliant symbols that have a leading FNC1 character. This indicates that GS1 Application Identifier (AI) data is encoded equivalent to the symbology identifier ]C1 for GS1-128 symbols, ]d2 for GS1 DataMatrix symbols and ]e0 for GS1 DataBar and Composite symbols. For more information on symbology identifiers, see the International Standard ISO/IEC 15424 Information technology — Automatic identification and data capture techniques — Data Carrier Identifiers.

For example, a GS1 QR Code symbol encoding AI (01) element string 10012345678902 produces the transmitted data string “]Q30110012345678902.” Data transmission follows the same principles that apply to the concatenation of AI element strings in any GS1 barcode that encodes GS1 Application Identifiers (see section 7.8).

Table 5-37 Symbology identifier for GS1 QR Code

Message content	Separator
]Q3	Standard AI element strings	None

5.7.4.4 Width and height of a module (X)

The X-dimension SHALL be constant throughout a given symbol. The X-dimension SHOULD apply to both the width and height of the modules.

5.7.4.5 Symbol quality grade

The International Standard ISO/IEC 15415 Information technology - Automatic identification and data capture techniques – Bar code symbol print quality test specification - Two-dimensional symbols methodology SHALL be used for measuring and grading GS1 QR Code Symbols. The print quality grade is measured by verifiers that comply with the standard. The grade includes a grade level, measuring aperture, the wavelength of light used for the measurement and the illumination angle relative to the symbol.

A symbol grade is only meaningful if it is reported in conjunction with the illumination and aperture used. It should be shown in the format grade/aperture/light/angle, where: "grade" is the overall symbol grade as defined in ISO/IEC 15415 Information technology -

Automatic identification and data capture techniques – Bar code symbol print quality test specification - Two-dimensional symbols (e.g., the arithmetic mean to one decimal place of the Scan Reflectance Profile or scan grades). For GS1 QR Code, the grade number may be followed by an asterisk (*) which indicates that the surroundings of the symbol contain extremes of reflectance that may interfere with reading. For most applications, this should be specified as causing the symbol to fail.

"aperture" is the diameter in thousandths of an inch (to the nearest thousandth) of the

synthetic aperture defined in ISO/IEC 15415 Information technology - Automatic identification and data capture techniques – Bar code symbol print quality test specification - Two- dimensional symbols. "light" defines the illumination: A numeric value indicates the peak light wavelength in
nanometres (for narrow band illumination); the alphabetic character W indicates that the symbol has been measured with broadband illumination (white light) the spectral response characteristics of which must imperatively be defined or have their source specification clearly referenced.

"angle" is an additional parameter defining the angle of incidence (relative to the plane of the

symbol) of the illumination. It SHALL be included in the reporting of the overall symbol grade when the angle of incidence is other than 45 degrees. Its absence indicates that the angle of incidence is 45 degrees. The aperture is normally specified as being 80% of the minimum X-dimension allowed for the application.

Examples: 2.8/05/660 would indicate that the average of the grades of the Scan Reflectance Profiles, or of

the scan grades, was 2.8 when these were obtained with the use of a 0.125 millimetre aperture (ref. No. 05) and a 660 nanometre light source, incident at 45 degrees. 2.8/10/W/30 would indicate the grade of a symbol intended to be read in broadband light,
measured with light incident at 30 degrees and using a 0.250 millimetre aperture (ref. No. 10), but would need to be accompanied either by a reference to the application specification defining the reference spectral characteristics used for measurement or a definition of the spectral characteristics themselves.

2.8/10/660* would indicate the grade of a symbol measured using a 0.250 millimetre aperture

(ref. No. 10), a 660 nanometre light source and indicates the presence of a potentially interfering extreme reflectance value in the surroundings of the symbol. Recommended symbol grades for GS1 QR Code are identified in individual applications in section 5.12.

5.7.4.6 Advice for selecting the symbology

Any use of GS1 QR Code should comply with GS1 system global application standards and be restricted to those applications defined by the GS1 system for GS1 QR Code. GS1 QR Code will not replace other GS1 system symbologies. Existing applications that are satisfactorily utilising EAN/UPC symbols, ITF-14 symbols, GS1-128 symbols, GS1 DataBar symbols, GS1 DataMatrix or GS1 composite symbols should continue to use them.

Note: Scanning systems that need to read GS1 QR Code symbols must be 2D imaging scanners and be appropriately programmed to read the GS1 system versions of ISO/IEC 18004:2015.

5.7.4.7 Human readable interpretation of GS1 QR Code symbols

For human readable interpretation rules see section 4.14.

5.8 Two dimensional barcodes - GS1 DotCode symbology

5.8.1 Introduction

This section provides a summary description and overview of the GS1 DotCode symbology. A more detailed technical specification can be found in the Information Technology – Automatic Identification and Data Capture Techniques – Bar Code Symbology Specifications – DotCode, Rev 3.0, August 2014 which is available from AIM. When AIM DotCode encodes GS1 system data, it is referred to as GS1 DotCode.

The GS1 system has adopted GS1 DotCode based on its ability to encode GS1 identification keys while printing the barcode inline at high production speeds. Implementation of GS1 DotCode SHALL be per approved GS1 system application standard section 2.1.14.

5.8.2 GS1 DotCode symbology

The technical description of GS1 DotCode contained within this section provides additional information based on AIM DotCode Specification. It is provided as a further aid in the development of specific applications.

Not supported for the GS1 system: Structured append This feature allows files of data to be represented logically and continuously in DotCode symbols. These may be scanned in any sequence to enable the original data to be correctly reconstructed.

Not supported for the GS1 system: Extended channel interpretations This mechanism enables data using character sets other than the default encodable set (e.g., Arabic, Cyrillic, Greek) and other data interpretations (e.g., compacted data using defined compression schemes) or other industry-specific requirements to be encoded.

5.8.2.1 Data transmission and symbology identifier prefixes

The GS1 system requires the use of symbology identifiers. GS1 DotCode uses the symbology identifier of "]J1" (see Table 5-38) for GS1 system compliant symbols. This indicates that Application Identifier (AI) data is encoded equivalent to the symbology identifier "]C1" for GS1-128 symbols, ]d2 for GS1 DataMatrix symbols, ]Q3 for QR Code symbols and “]e0” for GS1 DataBar and Composite symbols. For more information on symbology identifiers, see the International Standard ISO/IEC 15424 Information technology — Automatic identification and data capture techniques — Data Carrier Identifiers.

For example, a GS1 DotCode symbol encoding AI (01) element string 10012345678902 produces the transmitted data string “]J10110012345678902.” Data transmission follows the same principles that apply to the concatenation of AI element strings in any GS1 barcode that encodes Application Identifiers (see section 7.8).

Table 5-38 Symbology identifier for GS1 DotCode

Message content	Separator
]J1	Standard AI element strings	None

5.8.2.2 Width and height of a module (X)

The X-dimension SHALL be constant throughout a given symbol. The X-dimension refers to both the width and height of the modules.

5.8.2.3 Symbol quality grade

Minimum symbol grades for GS1 DotCode are specified in individual applications standards in section 2 which refer to symbol specification tables in section 5.12.3.12.

5.8.2.4 Advice for selecting the symbology

GS1 DotCode SHALL only be used to meet the requirements of the EU tobacco traceability regulation EU 2018/574 as set out in section 2.1.14.

5.8.2.5 Human readable interpretation of GS1 DotCode symbols

For human readable interpretation rules see section 4.14.

5.9 Two dimensional barcodes - Data Matrix symbology

Data Matrix implementing ECC 200 error correction is an International Standard ISO/IEC 16022. Data Matrix is only used by the GS1 system to encode the GS1 Digital Link URI syntax. For full technical aspects of Data Matrix, see ISO/IEC 16022.

5.10 Two dimensional barcodes - QR Code symbology

QR Code is an International Standard ISO/IEC 18004. QR Code is only used by the GS1 system to encode the GS1 Digital Link URI syntax. For full technical aspects of QR Code, see ISO/IEC 18004.

5.11 Composite barcodes

5.11.1 Composite symbology introduction

The Composite symbology integrates both a GS1 system linear symbol and a 2D Composite Component as a single symbology. There are three types of Composite symbols A, B and C, each with different encoding rules. The encoder model is designed to automatically select the appropriate type and optimise.

The linear component encodes the item’s primary identification. The adjacent 2D Composite Component encodes supplementary data, such as a batch number and expiration date. The Composite symbol always includes a linear component so that the primary identification is readable by all scanning technologies. The Composite symbol always includes a multi-row 2D Composite Component that can be read with linear- and area-CCD scanners and with linear and rastering laser scanners.

The Composite symbology is described in the Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility AIM ITS 99-002 - International Symbology Specification - Composite Symbology.

5.11.1.1 Composite symbology characteristics

The characteristics of the Composite symbology are: Encodable character set:

Both linear and 2D components encode a subset of ISO/IEC 646. Refer to Table 7-20 for the
allowed encodable character set.

The Function 1 Symbol Character (FNC1), and a Symbol Separator character.

Symbol character structure: Various (n,k) symbol characters are used in accordance with the
underlying symbology of the selected linear and 2D Composite Components of the symbol.

Code type:

Linear component: continuous, linear barcode symbology.
2D Composite Component: continuous, multi-row barcode symbology.
Maximum numeric data capacity:
Linear component:
GS1-128 symbol: up to 48 digits. - EAN/UPC symbol: 8, 12, or 13 digits. - GS1 DataBar Expanded symbol: up to 74 digits. - Other GS1 DataBar symbols: 16 digits. 2D Composite Component:
CC-A: up to 56 digits. - CC-B: up to 338 digits. - CC-C: up to 2,361 digit. Error detection and correction:
Linear component: a modulo check value for error detection.
2D Composite Component: a fixed or variable number of Reed-Solomon error correction
codewords, depending upon the specific 2D Composite Component.

Character self-checking.

Bi-directionally decodable.

5.11.1.2 Additional features

The following is a summary of additional Composite symbology features: Data compaction: The 2D Composite Components utilise a bit-oriented compaction mode

designed to encode data efficiently using GS1 Application Identifiers (AIs).

Component linkage: The 2D Composite Component of each Composite symbol contains a linkage

flag, which indicates to the reader that no data shall be transmitted unless the associated linear component is also scanned and decoded. All linear components except EAN/UPC symbols also contain an explicit linkage flag. GS1-128 symbol emulation: Readers set to the GS1-128 symbol emulation mode transmit the
data encoded within the Composite symbol as if the data were encoded in one or more GS1-128 symbols. A symbol separator character: A flag character to support future applications that instructs the
reader to terminate transmission of the message at that point and to transmit the remaining data as a separate message 2D Composite Component escape mechanism: A mechanism to support future GS1 system
applications that require characters beyond the ISO/IEC 646 character subset defined for GS1

Application Identifier (AI) element string data (see Table 7-20).

5.11.2 Symbol structure

Each Composite symbol consists of a linear component and a multi-row 2D Composite Component. The 2D Composite Component is printed above the linear component. The two components are separated by a separator pattern. Up to 3X of light space is permitted between the separator pattern and 2D Composite Component to facilitate printing the two components separately;

however, if the two components are printed at one time, the nominal alignment is followed as shown in the figure below. (01)13112345678906(17)010615(10)A123456

Figure 5-53 GS1 DataBar Limited Composite symbol with CC-A

In Figure 5-53, the AI (01) Global Trade Item Number (GTIN) is encoded in the GS1 DataBar Limited linear component. The AI (17) expiration date and the AI (10) lot number are encoded in the CC-A 2D Composite Component.

The linear component is one of the following: A member of the EAN/UPC symbology (EAN-13, EAN-8, UPC-A, or UPC-E).

A member of the GS1 DataBar family.
A GS1-128 symbol.
The choice of linear component determines the name of the Composite symbol, such as an EAN-13

Composite symbol, or a GS1-128 Composite symbol. The 2D Composite Component (abbreviated as CC) is chosen based on the selected linear component and on the amount of supplementary data to be encoded. The three 2D Composite Components, listed in order of increasing maximum data capacity, are:

CC-A: a variant of MicroPDF417.

CC-B: a MicroPDF417 symbol with new encoding rules.
CC-C: a PDF417 symbol with new encoding rules.
(01)03812345678908(10)ABCD123456(410)3898765432108

Figure 5-54 GS1-128 Composite symbol with CC-C

In Figure 5-54, the AI (01) GTIN is encoded in the GS1-128 symbol linear component. The AI (10) lot number and the AI (410) ship-to location are encoded in the CC-C 2D Composite Component.

Based upon the width of the linear component, a choice of “best-fit” 2D Composite Component is specified. Table 5-39 lists all of the permissible combinations.

Table 5-39 Permissible combinations of linear and 2D Composite Components

Linear component	CC-A/CC-B	CC-C
UPC-A and EAN-13	Yes (4-columns)	No
EAN-8	Yes (3-columns)	No
UPC-E	Yes (2-columns)	No
GS1-128	Yes (4-columns)	Yes (variable width)
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional and GS1 DataBar Truncated	Yes (4-columns)	No
GS1 DataBar Stacked and GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional	Yes (2-columns)	No
GS1 DataBar Limited	Yes (3-columns)	No
GS1 DataBar Expanded and GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked	Yes (4-columns)	No

5.11.2.1 CC-A structure

CC-A is a variant of MicroPDF417 with a unique combination of row address patterns (RAP). It is the smallest of the 2D Composite Components and can encode up to 56 digits. It has from 3 to 12 rows and 2 to 4 columns.

Each row is a minimum of 2X high (where X is the width of a module, narrow bar, or space). A 1X high minimum separator pattern is positioned between the linear component and 2D Composite Component. (A different separator pattern, 6X high, is used in Composite symbols with EAN/UPC linear components).

Each column contains one n,k = 17,4 data or error correction character (codeword) per row (n is the number of modules and k is the number of bars and also the number of spaces). So, the width of a codeword is 17X.

In addition to the codeword columns, CC-A has two or three n,k = 10,3 RAP columns that encode the row numbers (each 10X wide). The rightmost RAP column is terminated on the right by a 1X bar, so it is 11X instead of 10X wide.

Each row also requires a 1X Quiet Zone at each end. There is no Quiet Zone required above CC-A. The separator pattern is printed directly above the linear component and no Quiet Zone is required below the CC-A.

The two-column and three-column CC-A versions have two RAP columns and the four-column CC-A version has three RAP columns, as shown in the figure below. Two-column CC-A structure

Quiet Zone	RAP column	Codeword column	Codeword column	RAP column	Quiet Zone

Three-column CC-A structure

Quiet Zone	Codeword column	RAP column	Codeword column	Codeword column	RAP column	Quiet Zone

Four-column CC-A structure

Quiet Zone	RAP column	Codeword column	Codeword column	RAP column	Codeword column	Codeword column	RAP column	Quiet Zone

Figure 5-55 CC-A column structures

Table 5-40 lists all possible column and row combinations for CC-A. It also shows the capacity and size of the 2D Composite Components. For example, a two-column, five-row CC-A would be 57X wide (including 1X for the extra right-most guard bar) by 10X high (not including the separator pattern). With an X-dimension of 0.254 millimetre (0.0100 inch), it would be 14.48 millimetres (0.57 inch) wide by 2.54 millimetre (0.100 inch) high.

Table 5-40 CC-A row and column sizes

Number of	Number of rows (r)	Total CWs in data region	Number of EC CWs (k)	Percent of CWs for ec	Number of CWs for data	Max alpha chars	Max digits	Component	Component height, in X (see note 2)
data	width, in X
columns	(see note
(c)	1)
2	5	10	4	40.00%	6	8	16	57	10
2	6	12	4	33.33%	8	12	22	57	12
2	7	14	5	35.71%	9	13	24	57	14
2	8	16	5	31.25%	11	17	30	57	16
2	9	18	6	33.33%	12	18	33	57	18
2	10	20	6	30.00%	14	22	39	57	20
2	12	24	7	29.17%	17	26	47	57	24
3	4	12	4	33.33%	8	12	22	74	8
3	5	15	5	33.33%	10	15	27	74	10
3	6	18	6	33.33%	12	18	33	74	12
3	7	21	7	33.33%	14	22	39	74	14
3	8	24	7	29.17%	17	26	47	74	16
4	3	12	4	33.33%	8	12	22	101	6
4	4	16	5	31.25%	11	17	30	101	8
4	5	20	6	30.00%	14	22	39	101	10
4	6	24	7	29.17%	17	26	47	101	12
4	7	28	8	28.57%	20	31	56	101	14

CW = Codeword; EC = Error correction Note 1: Includes a 1X Quiet Zone on each side. Note 2: Assumes row height = 2X; does not include separator pattern.

5.11.2.2 CC-B structure

CC-B is a MicroPDF417 symbol uniquely identified by the codeword 920 as the first codeword in the symbol. Encoding systems normally automatically select CC-B when the data to be encoded exceeds the capacity of CC-A. CC-B can encode up to 338 digits. It has from 10 to 44 rows and 2 to 4 columns.

Each row is a minimum of 2X high (where X is the width of a module, narrow bar or space). A 1X high minimum separator pattern is positioned between the linear component and 2D Composite Component. (A different separator pattern, 6X high, is used in Composite symbols with EAN/UPC linear components).

Each column contains one n,k = 17,4 data or error correction character (codeword) per row (where n is the number of modules and k is the number of bars and also the number of spaces). So the width of a codeword is 17X.

In addition to the codeword columns, CC-B has two or three n,k = 10,3 row address pattern (RAP) columns that encode the row numbers (each 10X wide). The rightmost RAP column is terminated on the right by a 1X bar, so it is 11X instead of 10X wide.

Each row also requires a 1X Quiet Zone on each end. There is no Quiet Zone required above CC-B. The separator pattern is printed directly above the linear component and no Quiet Zone is required below the CC-B.

The two-column CC-B version has two RAP columns and the three- and four-column CC-B versions have three RAP columns, as shown in the figure below. Two-column CC-B structure

Quiet Zone	RAP column	Codeword column	Codeword column	RAP column	Quiet Zone

Three-column CC-B structure

Quiet Zone	RAP column	Codeword column	RAP column	Codeword column	Codeword column	RAP column	Quiet Zone

Four-column CC-B structure

Quiet Zone	RAP column	Codeword column	Codeword column	RAP column	Codeword column	Codeword column	RAP column	Quiet Zone

Figure 5-56 CC-B column structures

CC-B differs from CC-A in the three-column structure in that CC-B has a third RAP column on the left end that is missing in CC-A.

Table 5-41 lists all the possible column and row combinations for CC-B. It also shows the capacity and size of the 2D Composite Components. For example, a four-column, 10-row CC-B would be 101X wide by 20X high (not including the separator pattern). With an X-dimension of 0.254 millimetre (0.0100 inch), it would be 25.65 millimetres (1.010 inches) wide by 5.08 millimetres (0.200 inch) high.

Table 5-41 CC-B row and column sizes

Number of data columns (c)	Number of rows (r)	Total CWs in data region	Number of EC CWs (k)	Percent of CWs for EC	Number of non-EC CWs	Number of CWs for data (note 1)	Max alpha chars	Max digits	CC-B	CC-B
width,	height,
in X	in X
(see	(see
note 2)	note 3)
2	17	34	10	29	24	22	34	59	57	34
2	20	40	11	28	29	27	42	73	57	40
2	23	46	13	28	33	31	48	84	57	46
2	26	52	15	29	37	35	55	96	57	52
3	15	45	21	47	24	22	34	59	84	30

Number of data columns (c)	Number of rows (r)	Total CWs in data region	Number of EC CWs (k)	Percent of CWs for EC	Number of non-EC CWs	Number of CWs for data (note 1)	Max alpha chars	Max digits	CC-B	CC-B
width,	height,
in X	in X
(see	(see
note 2)	note 3)
3	20	60	26	43	34	32	50	86	84	40
3	26	78	32	41	46	44	68	118	84	52
3	32	96	38	40	58	56	88	153	84	64
3	38	114	44	39	70	68	107	185	84	76
3	44	132	50	38	82	80	127	219	84	88
4	10	40	16	40	24	22	34	59	101	20
4	12	48	18	38	30	28	43	75	101	24
4	15	60	21	35	39	37	58	100	101	30
4	20	80	26	33	54	52	82	141	101	40
4	26	104	32	31	72	70	111	192	101	52
4	32	128	38	30	90	88	139	240	101	64
4	38	152	44	29	108	106	168	290	101	76
4	44	176	50	28	126	124	196	338	101	88

CW = Codeword; EC = Error correction Note 1: Excludes EC codewords and 2 codewords to define CC-B encodation. Note 2: Including 1X Quiet Zones on either side. Note 3: Assumes Y = 2X; does not include separator pattern.

5.11.2.3 CC-C structure

CC-C is a PDF417 symbol uniquely identified by the codeword 920 as the first codeword in the symbol following the symbol length descriptor. CC-C is only used as a 2D Composite Component within a GS1-128 Composite symbol. It has the greatest data capacity of the Composite symbols, encoding up to 2,361 digits. It has from 3 to 30 rows and 1 to 30 data/EC codeword columns.

Each row is a minimum of 3X high (where X is the width of a module, narrow bar, or space). A 1X high minimum separator pattern is positioned between the linear component and 2D Composite Component.

In addition to the codeword columns, CC-C has two 17,4 row indicator columns, a 17X wide start pattern and a 18X wide stop pattern as illustrated in Figure 5-57. Each row also requires a 2X Quiet Zone on each end. There is no Quiet Zone required above CC-C.

The separator pattern is printed directly above the linear component and no Quiet Zone is required below the CC-C.

Quiet Zone	Start pattern	Left row indicator column	1 to 30 Data/EC codeword columns	Right row indicator column	Stop pattern	Quiet Zone

Figure 5-57 CC-C row structure

CC-C is normally printed with the number of columns that will result in a width nearly matching the width of the GS1-128 symbol linear component. However, as an option, the user may specify a wider CC-C to be printed. This reduces the height of the 2D Composite Component. A lower Composite symbol may be needed to fit in a height-restricted application. A wider CC-C may also be required if the amount of data does not fit in the default width CC-C.

5.11.2.4 Special compressed element string sequences

While 2D Composite Components can encode any sequence of GS1 Application Identifier (AI) element strings up to the maximum capacity of the component, certain sequences of AI element strings have been selected for special compression in 2D Composite Component symbols. If the application requires the use of the AI element strings in one of these sequences, and they are used in the predefined sequence, a smaller symbol will result.

For special compression to be performed, the AI element string sequence must occur at the start of the 2D Composite Component’s data. Other AI element strings may be added following the sequence. The AI element strings selected for special compression are:

Production date and lot number: AI (11) production date followed by AI (10) lot number.

Expiration date and lot number: AI (17) expiration date followed by AI (10) lot number.
AI (90): AI (90) followed by the element string data starting with an alphabetic character and a
digit; AI (90) may be used to encode data identifier data; the AI (90) followed by data in the data identifier format has special compression applied only if it is the start of the first element string.

5.11.3 Human readable interpretation of Composite symbols

For human readable interpretation rules see section 4.14. For HRI rules specific to regulated healthcare retail consumer trade items, see section 4.14.1.

5.11.4 Data transmission and symbology identifier prefixes

5.11.4.1 Default transmission mode

The GS1 system requires the use of symbology identifiers. Composite symbols are normally transmitted using symbology identifier prefix ]e0, with the data from the 2D Composite Component directly appended to that of the linear component. For example, a Composite symbol encoding (01)10012345678902(10)ABC123 produces the data string “]e0011001234567890210ABC123” (note that the symbology identifier prefix ]e0 is different from the symbology identifier prefix ]E0, which has an uppercase “E” and is used for standard EAN/UPC symbols). However, readers have an option to transmit only the linear component data and ignore the 2D Composite Component.

Data transmission follows the same principles that apply to the concatenation of GS1 Application Identifier (AI) element strings from GS1-128 symbols. If the linear component data ends with a variable length AI element string, the control character (ASCII value 29 (decimal), 1D (hexadecimal)) is inserted between it and the first character of the data from the 2D Composite Component.

5.11.4.2 GS1-128 Symbol transmission mode

Readers also have an option for GS1-128 symbol emulation mode. This mode emulates the GS1-128 symbology for data transmission. It can be used for applications programmed for GS1-128 symbols but not yet programmed to recognise the symbology identifier prefix ]e0. The symbology identifier for GS1-128 symbol emulation mode is ]C1. Composite symbols that exceed 48 data characters are transmitted as two or more messages so as not to exceed the maximum GS1-128 symbol message length. Each of the messages has a symbology identifier prefix of ]C1 and does not exceed 48 data characters. The messages are split at boundaries between element strings. This mode is inferior to the normal transmission mode as message integrity may be lost when a message is split into multiple messages.

Note: When GS1-128 emulation option is enabled in the reader, each data packet (except the data from an EAN/UPC component) SHALL be prefixed with a symbology identifier of ]C1. When transmitting data from GS1 Composite symbols, two separate transmissions from the reader are required. The data from the EAN/UPC component is prefixed with a symbology identifier in accordance with symbology identifier “E”. Modifier character values 1 and 2 SHALL NOT be used when transmitting data from GS1 DataBar symbols.

5.11.4.3 Symbol separator character

The 2D Composite Component can encode symbol separator characters as defined in the decoder. This character instructs the reader to terminate the current Composite symbol’s data message and transmit the data following the symbol separator as a separate message. This new message will have the symbology identifier prefix of ]e1. This feature will be used for future GS1 system applications such as encoding the mixed contents of a logistical container.

5.11.4.4 2D Composite Component escape mechanism

The CC-B and CC-C also can encode 2D Composite Component escape mechanism codewords. These instruct the reader to terminate the current Composite symbol’s data message and transmit the data following the escape mechanism codeword as a separate message. This new message has the symbology identifier prefix of ]e2 for standard data message. The codewords following the escape mechanism codeword are encoded and decoded using the standard PDF417 encoding defined in ISO/IEC 15438 – Information technology; automatic identification and data capture techniques - Symbology specification - PDF417. This feature is used for future GS1 system applications that require characters beyond the ISO/IEC 646 character subset defined for GS1 Application Identifier (AI) element string data (see Table 7-20).

Note: The protocol for ]e2 corresponds to the protocol defined for PDF417 using symbology identifier ]L2.

5.11.5 Width of a module (X)

The X-dimension of the 2D Composite Component must be the same as that of the associated linear component. Refer to the linear component’s X-dimension requirements.

5.11.6 Print quality

The print quality assessment methodology defined in the International Standard ISO/IEC 15416 is used for measuring and grading the linear components. The ISO print quality specification is functionally identical to the older ANSI and CEN print quality specifications. The print quality grade is measured by verifiers that apply the standard. The print quality grade reported includes a grade level, measuring aperture and the wavelength of light used for the measurement.

AIM ITS 99-002 – International Symbology Specification - MicroPDF417 and ISO/IEC 15438 specify the methods for determining the print quality grade of the 2D Composite Components CC-A/B and CC-C respectively. An additional grading parameter unused error correction (UEC) is defined in these specifications.

The minimum quality grade for Composite symbols is:

1.5 / 6 / 660

Where- 1.5 is the overall symbol quality grade.
6 is the measuring aperture reference number (corresponding to a 0.15 millimetre or 0.006 inch
diameter aperture).

660 is the peak response wavelength in nanometres. In addition to the print quality grade, all

elements in the separator patterns SHOULD be visually distinguishable.

Both the linear component and the 2D Composite Component must independently achieve the minimum print quality grade.

5.11.7 Advice for selecting a symbology

Any use of the 2D Composite Component SHALL comply with GS1 system global application standards and multiple barcode management practices (see section 4.15). The linear component of a Composite symbol should be selected according to the application rules defined in these GS1 General Specifications, but where a choice of linear components is available for the application, consideration should also be given to the 2D Composite Component options available. A wider linear component will result in a shorter 2D Composite Component and, particularly for CC-B, a higher capacity symbol.

For CC-A and CC-B, the selection of the linear component automatically determines the number of columns of the 2D Composite Component. The selection of CC-A or CC-B is automatically determined by the amount of data to be encoded. CC-A is always used unless the data exceeds its capacity.

When the linear component is a GS1-128 symbol, the user may specify CC-A/B or CC-C. CC-A/B will produce a smaller 2D Composite Component. However, CC-C can increase in width to match the width of the GS1-128 symbol or be selected to be even wider. This may produce a Composite symbol of lower height. CC-C also has a larger data capacity, so it is suitable for applications such as logistics.

5.11.8 Sample Composite symbols

(21)1234-abcd

Figure 5-58 EAN-13 symbol with a four-column CC-A component

Figure 5-59 UPC-A symbol with a four-column CC-B component

Ser. #: A12345678

Figure 5-60 EAN-8 symbol with a three-column CC-A (15)021231

Figure 5-61 UPC-E symbol with a two-column CC-A (01)03612345678904(11)990102

Figure 5-62 GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional symbol with a four-column CC-A (01)03412345678900(17)010200

Figure 5-63 GS1 DataBar Stacked symbol with a two-column CC-A (01)03512345678907

Figure 5-64 GS1 DataBar Limited symbol with a three-column CC-B

Note: The three-column CC-B is wider than the three-column CC-A shown in Figure 5-53. (01)93712345678904(3103)001234 (91)1A2B3C4D5E

Figure 5-65 GS1 DataBar Expanded symbol with a four-column CC-A (01)03212345678906 (21)A1B2C3D4E5F6G7H8

Figure 5-66 GS1-128 symbol with a four-column CC-A

5.12 Barcode production and quality assessment

5.12.1 Introduction

This section has been evolving to meet the changes to data carriers and their use within the GS1 system. Some of those changes are, for example, dimension requirements, the introduction of new symbols (e.g., GS1 DataBar and Composite Component) and the shift from the use of analogue film masters to digital barcode files.

Consideration should be given to how these changes affect barcode production and the maintenance of quality in the production process.

5.12.2 Dimensional specifications and operational requirements

Over the years, operational requirements of GS1 system users have influenced the dimensional specifications of GS1 system symbols and these dimensional specifications have in turn influenced the development of scanning system optics and printing processes. The dimensional requirements for each application area defined in section 2 are set out in the GS1 symbol specification tables (SSTs) (see section 5.12.3). Each SST provides the following barcode specification detail:

The barcode(s) specified by the GS1 system for each application area.

The minimum, target and maximum X-dimension (narrow element width) for the symbol, based
on the scanning environment. Please note that a smaller X-dimension may result in a lower scanning performance. The minimum and target barcode height, based on the scanning environment. Please note that
reducing the symbol height may result in a lower scanning performance.

The Quiet Zone width and, for main and supplemental symbols, the minimum and maximum

separation between the two symbols. (These measurements are expressed as multiples of the X-dimension in the form nX.) The minimum ISO quality specification expressed as g.g/aa/www, where g.g is the minimum
overall symbol grade to one decimal place (on a 4.0 scale), aa is the effective measuring aperture in thousandths of an inch and www is the wavelength of the light source in nanometres. Note: Please refer to section 2 for any specific application standard (such as section 2.1.6, Healthcare secondary packaging and section 2.6.14, Permanently marked items) that may supplement or supersede these symbol specification tables for specific application areas.

Before determining the exact symbol specification required, additional factors, such as the scanning environment, SHALL be considered. These are summarised in section 5.12.2.1.

5.12.2.1 Role of the symbol’s dimensional specifications

The four major dimensional specifications are the symbol’s minimum, target and maximum X- dimensions and the symbol’s minimum bar height. These dimensional characteristics are always specified for a particular operating environment. The minimum and maximum X-dimensions are determined by the scanner's operating range (field of view). The target X-dimension is the ideal size for a particular application and is only affected by the choice between linear or two-dimensional symbols (when the application allows for both symbol types). The barcode's height is determined by the ergonomic aspects of product handling when using a scanner. These dimensional specifications are critical for the efficient use of all scanners.

5.12.2.2 Omnidirectional scanning and the term magnification

The EAN/UPC symbology was originally designed for omnidirectional scanners. For this type of scanner, the specifications define a fixed relationship between the symbol's width and height. The term "fixed aspect ratio" is used to refer to this fixed proportion. For example, an EAN-13 symbol with an X-dimension of 0.330 mm (0.0130 inch), its nominal dimension, has a width of 37.29 mm (1.468 inch) and a bar height of 22.85 mm (0.900 inch). The term magnification has been used to refer to a range of sizes below, at, or above the nominal dimension (100% magnification) for EAN/UPC symbols used in the omnidirectional scanning environment. The symbol specification tables (SSTs) do not use magnification values and instead list the target, minimum and maximum values for the symbol's X-dimension and height.

5.12.2.3 Laser versus image-based scanning

Most scanners based on laser technology can scan all linear symbologies in the GS1 system. New laser and linear array scanners are even capable of scanning GS1 DataBar and Composite Component symbols. 2D Imaging technology, such as array scanners and vision systems, are capable of scanning all symbols in the GS1 system, including GS1 conformant 2D barcodes (GS1 DataMatrix, GS1 QR Code, GS1 DotCode, QR Code (GS1 Digital Link URI) and Data Matrix (GS1 Digital Link URI)). Note that linear imagers, like laser scanners, cannot scan 2D barcodes; only 2D or array imaging scanners can scan GS1 conformant 2D barcodes, as well as camera based or vision systems.

5.12.2.4 Printing considerations

The functional and operative bands provide printers and labellers with the flexibility needed to produce quality symbols over a wide range of processes. Once a scanning operational environment is determined and the allowable specification range is known, the printer should be consulted for guidance on:

The minimum recommended symbol size based on printing press or print characterisation tests.

Colour/substrate considerations (e.g., separate print station for symbol or double ink layer).
The optimum orientation of the symbol on the printed web (the direction of movement of the
media in relation to a printing plate on a printing press).

Direct part marking, such as is done by dot peening on items, requires special considerations for

material properties.

Laser or chemically etched parts with low contrast or light marked elements on a dark

background (e.g., circuit boards and electronic components, medical instruments, surgical implants). High-speed ink jet printed parts and components where the marked dots cannot form a
scannable linear symbol.

Very small items that require a symbology with a square aspect ratio and/or cannot be marked

within the allocated packaging space by existing GS1 DataBar and Composite symbols.

5.12.2.5 Packaging considerations

Once a scanning operational environment is determined and the allowable symbol characteristics are known, the package designer should be consulted to: Ensure the symbol will not be obstructed by other graphics or package design parameters (e.g.,

folds, creases, corner wraps, flaps, laminates, embossed logos/patterns, text).

Ensure that only the symbol intended for scanning will be scanned (e.g., obscure all symbols on

the individual units within larger trade items so that the individual units' symbols do not scan instead of the larger unit's symbol). Section 6 contains complete information on symbol placement criteria to meet quality and ergonomic needs.

5.12.2.6 GS1 system scanner functional operative bands

Symbol selection and specifications for AIDC application standards are centralised in the symbol specification tables. In establishing X-dimension specifications for symbol specification tables, the scanner functional operative bands below are normative as they illustrate X-dimension ranges deployed by industry based on GS1 standards. The twelve scanner functional bands that have evolved to meet user needs are illustrated in the figure below.

Figure 5-67 GS1 scanner functional operative bands

Note: Figure not to scale and target size for each functional band can be found in the symbol specification tables (see section 5.12.3) The scanner functional bands The omnidirectional scanners for general retail/POS band is primarily intended for general retail

consumer trade items to provide orientation-free scanning in high-volume check-out lanes.

Scanners are designed to read over-square symbols such as EAN/UPC and GS1 DataBar Retail POS family. The approximate average distance between scanner and symbol is 100 millimetres (4 inches).

The linear barcodes for imaging scanners for retail pharmacies band is intended for regulated

healthcare consumer trade items sold in a pharmacy or apothecary that is a separate retail store or a “controlled” area for distribution of healthcare trade items inside a larger retail operation. This band allows for the use of 2D barcodes but this functional band shows the X-dimension ranges used for linear barcodes. Over the counter trade items that are sold in retail pharmacy but also general retail are marked according to general retail scanning specifications.

The fixed scanners in general distribution band is primarily intended to facilitate automated

scanning of trade items packaged for transport and logistic units using fixed mount scanners. In this environment it is essential to maintain symbol height and location to achieve acceptable scan rates. Linear barcodes for both retail and general distribution band covers trade items in specific
packaging suitable for transport purposes in general distribution scanning, but that are also scanned as general retail consumer trade items. See the overlap area between EAN/UPC retail and general distribution (Retail/GD) in Figure 5-67. The imaging scanners for non-retail regulated healthcare trade items band is intended for non-
retail regulated healthcare consumer trade items sold outside of the retail channel. For example, these X-dimension bands should be used for products destined for hospitals or nursing homes that will never be scanned in a retail pharmacy. The linear barcodes for hand scanning band is intended for non-retail trade items using a linear
barcode.

The Composite Component barcodes for hand scanning band is intended for non-retail trade

items using Composite Component barcodes which are, in effect, a multi-row 2D linear barcode.

In general, the rule is that Composite Components SHALL be printed at the same X-dimension as their linear host. GS1 DataMatrix symbols SHALL be printed at X-dimensions that are 50 percent greater than corresponding linear symbols with Composite Components. Therefore, the bands for linear symbols and Composite Components are very similar in X-dimension and if the same scanner types are chosen, as in the case of Composite symbols, the bands become one.

The 2D barcodes for automated scanning by imaging scanners in general distribution band has

been added to show the X-dimension band used by those who support general distribution of regulated healthcare consumer trade items which may be marked with GS1 DataMatrix. 2D barcodes for imaging scanners for retail pharmacy band is intended for regulated healthcare
consumer trade items sold in a pharmacy or apothecary that is a separate retail store or a “controlled” area for distribution of healthcare trade items inside a larger retail operation. This band allows for the use of linear symbols but this functional band shows the X-dimension ranges used for 2D barcodes. Over the counter trade items that are sold in retail pharmacy but also general retail are marked according to general retail scanning specifications.

Today, there is no functional band for mobile devices as the variables of symbol selection, data,

operative scanning environment and allowable symbol specifications for size would require a detailed table solely for mobile devices. At this time, the assumption for mobile devices is that they will support all currently approved symbols, symbol data scenarios and symbol size specifications however where testing and/or practical experience shows a constraint, this will be addressed in GS1 standards.

Figure 5-68 GS1 symbology operational environment decision tree

Note: If an item is a general retail consumer trade item and regulated healthcare retail consumer trade item then the barcode marking for general retail is required at a minimum.

Table 5-42. Summary of the symbol specification tables per following Figure 5-68 GS1 symbology operational environment decision tree

Symbol spec. tables	General retail POS	Retail pharmacy	* Non- retail pharmacy
labelling
and
marking
Table 1	Yes
Table 2	Yes	Yes
Table 3	Yes	Yes
Table 4	Yes	Yes
Table 5	Yes	Yes
Table 6	Yes
Table 7	Yes	Yes	Yes
Table 8	Yes	Yes	Yes
Table 9	Yes	Yes
Table 10	Yes
Table 11	Yes
Table 12	Yes
Table 13	Yes	Yes
* Table 6 SHOULD be used for products scanned at bedside

5.12.3 GS1 symbol specification tables

In order to find the correct barcode specification, you must: Find the appropriate GS1 system application area using Figure 5-67.

If the application area references two symbol specification tables, use the decision tree in Figure
5-68 to determine which one to use.

The table below provides a quick reference list of the symbol quality parameters depending on their type and their application.

Table 5-43 Quick reference on symbol quality

Symbology	Application or ID key		ISO (ANSI)	Aperture	Wavelength
			symbol grade
EAN/UPC	GTIN-8	1.5 (C)		See symbol specification tables 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 and 10 for values	660 nm +/-10
EAN/UPC	GTIN-12	1.5 (C)		See symbol specification tables 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 and 10 for values	660 nm +/-10
EAN/UPC	GTIN-13	1.5 (C)		See symbol specification tables 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 and 10 for values	660 nm +/-10
GS1-128	GTIN-12, GTIN-13, GTIN-14	1.5 (C)		See symbol specification tables 2, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 and 10 for values	660 nm +/-10
GS1-128	SSCC	1.5 (C)		10 mils	660 nm +/-10
ITF-14 (<0.635 mm (0.025 in.) X)	GTIN-12, GTIN-13, GTIN-14	1.5 (C)		See symbol specification tables 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10 for values	660 nm +/-10
ITF-14 (≥0.635 mm (0.025 in.) X)	GTIN-12, GTIN-13, GTIN-14	0.5 (D)		20 mils	660 nm +/-10
Composite	GTIN-8, GTIN-12, GTIN-13, GTIN-14 and other AIs	1.5 (C)		6 mils	660 nm +/-10
GS1 DataBar	GTIN-8, GTIN-12, GTIN-13, GTIN-14 and other AIs	1.5 (C)		See symbol specification tables 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 and 11	660 nm +/-10
GS1 DataMatrix	Direct part marking, regulated healthcare retail or non-retail consumer trade items, extended packaging and logistic units	1.5 (C)		See symbol specification tables 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11 Table 1 Addendum 1 for AI (8200) for values.	660 nm +/-10
GS1 QR Code	Direct part marking, custom trade item, extended packaging, GDTI, logistic units and GSRN	1.5 (C)		See symbol specification tables 1 Addendum 1 for AI (8200), 5, 7, 9 and 11 for values.	660 nm +/-10
GS1-128, GS1 DataMatrix, GS1 QR Code, GS1 DotCode	Supporting European Regulation 2018/574 on technical standards for the establishment and operation of a traceability system for tobacco products	3.5 (A)		See symbol specification tables 12	660 nm +/- 10
Data Matrix	GS1 Digital Link Standard URI syntax for extended packaging applications	1.5 (C)		See symbol specification table 1 Addendum 2 for GS1 Digital Link for values	660 nm +/- 10

Symbology	Application or ID key	ISO (ANSI)	Aperture	Wavelength
symbol grade
QR Code	GS1 Digital Link Standard URI syntax for extended packaging applications	1.5 (C)	See symbol specification table 1 Addendum 2 for GS1 Digital Link for values	660 nm +/- 10

5.12.3.1 Symbol specification table 1 - Trade items scanned in general retail POS and not general

distribution

Table 5-44 GS1 symbol specification table 1

Main	X-dimension mm (inches)	(**) Minimum symbol height for	Quiet Zone	Minimum quality specification
symbol(s)	given X
specified	mm (inches)
(*) Minimum	Target	Maximum	For minimum X- dimension	For target X- dimension	For maximum X- dimension	Left	Right
EAN-13	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.28 (0.720")	22.85 (0.900")	45.70 (1.800")	11X	7X	1.5/06/660
EAN-8	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	14.58 (0.574")	18.23 (0.718")	36.46 (1.435")	7X	7X	1.5/06/660
UPC-A	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.28 (0.720")	22.85 (0.900")	45.70 (1.800")	9X	9X	1.5/06/660
UPC-E	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.28 (0.720")	22.85 (0.900")	45.70 (1.800")	9X	7X	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Omni- directional (****)	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	12.14 (0.478”)	15.19 (0.598”)	30.36 (1.195”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omni- directional (*) (**)	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260”)	25.10 (0.988 ”)	31.37 (1.235”)	62.70 (2.469”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Expanded	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	8.99 (0.354”)	11.23 (0.442”)	22.44 (0.883”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked (*****)	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.75 (0.738”)	23.44 (0.923”)	46.86 (1.845”)	None	None	1.5/06/660

Main	Min	Max
symbol(s)	X-dimension	(**) Minimum symbol height for	Quiet	separation	separation	Quiet	Min. Quality
Specified Plus	mm (inches)	given X mm (inches)	Zone	between	between	Zone	Spec.
Add-on 2 or 5	symbols	symbols
For min.	For target
(*)	For max. X-
Target	Maximum	X-	X-	Left	Right
Minimum	dimension
dimension	dimension
EAN-13 + 2	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.28 (0.720")	22.85 (0.900")	45.70 (1.800")	11X	7X	12X	5X	1.5/06/ 660
EAN-13 + 5	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.28 (0.720")	22.85 (0.900")	45.70 (1.800")	11X	7X	12X	5X	1.5/06/ 660
UPC-A + 2	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.28 (0.720")	22.85 (0.900")	45.70 (1.800")	9X	9X	12X	5X	1.5/06/ 660
UPC-A + 5	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.28 (0.720")	22.85 (0.900")	45.70 (1.800")	9X	9X	12X	5X	1.5/06/ 660
UPC-E + 2	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.28 (0.720")	22.85 (0.900")	45.70 (1.800")	9X	7X	12X	5X	1.5/06/ 660
UPC-E + 5	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.28 (0.720")	22.85 (0.900")	45.70 (1.800")	9X	7X	12X	5X	1.5/06/ 660

(*) These barcodes may only be printed using an X-dimension below 0.264 millimetre (0.0104 inch) under the following conditions:  The allowance for X-dimensions between 0.249 millimetre (0.0098 inch) and 0.264 millimetre (0.0104 inch) is only applicable to on demand (e.g., thermal, laser) print processes. For all other printing processes, an X- dimension of 0.264 millimetre (0.0104 inch) is attainable and is the minimum allowable size.

 When printing a minimum symbol with any method of printing, the area provided for printing the symbol and the required Quiet Zone SHOULD never be less than the area required for an X-dimension of 0.264 millimetre (0.0104 inch).

(**)  The minimum symbol height dimensions listed for all symbologies including EAN/UPC symbols do not include the human readable interpretation.  When printing a minimum symbol with any method of printing, the bar height SHALL NOT be truncated below the minimum as listed in the table above.

 Because of the operative scanning environment for EAN/UPC symbols, there is a direct relationship between the symbol’s height and width. This means the minimum symbol height listed is tied to the minimum, target and maximum X-dimension listed. There is no maximum for the height, but if the maximum X-dimension is used, the symbol height must be equal to or greater than those listed in the Minimum Symbol Height column.

 The minimum heights of EAN/UPC symbols do not include the extended bars: see section 5.2.3.2 for dimensions of the extended bars.  For GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked symbols, the table reflects the minimum symbol height for symbols that are two rows in height.

(***) In addition to the factors above related to digital printing, one other exception is permitted; For loose produce being weighed at the point-of-sale (POS) using GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional minimum X-dimension of 0.203 millimetre (0.0080 inch) is permitted but may produce scanning performance reduction. However, for POS, this performance drop off is not noticeable when the product must be weighed at the point-of-sale. Even with a slower scanning performance to conduct the transaction, the weighing process takes longer than the scanning process. For that reason, a lower minimum X-dimension should never be used on products crossing point-of-sale which are not weighed as loose produce during the scan event.

(****) The current symbol specification for GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (minimum height 33X) and GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional (minimum height 69X) indicate a square aspect ratio for the symbol segments. To enhance scanning performance, in an omnidirectional scanning environment, an over square aspect ratio SHALL be used following the example of the EAN/UPC symbology specification and rigorous field test of the GS1 DataBar symbology (46X or 95X).

(*****) For North American coupon codes using GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked in 2 row and 3 row configurations the X-dimension may be as low as 0.0080” (0.203mm) as long as a minimum overall bar height of 1.020” (25.91mm) is maintained. X-dimensions less than 0.0100” (.254mm) might not always be feasible for all GS1 DataBar coupon barcodes due to variables, such as printing process, symbol orientation and material. Due to the time sensitive nature of the coupon printing process, these variables should be considered during the design and barcode origination processes. Barcode verification should always be done from printing press proofs.

Note: See section 2.7 to ensure the correct symbol specification table is used.

Table 5-44 is used to determine the appropriate specifications for printing and quality control of the barcode used in the retail point-of-sale for products. In addition to the symbol used at general retail POS, an additional 2D barcode may be used to carry AI (8200). As AI (8200) has a mandatory association with GTIN, the GTIN within the symbol ensures compatibility with direct or indirect mode. GS1 DataMatrix is approved for all applications including regulated healthcare trade items covered by SSTs 6, 7, 8, 10 and 11, but for general retail consumer trade items, GS1 DataMatrix, QR Code with GS1 Digital Link URI and Data Matrix with GS1 Digital Link URI are GS1 conformant options. When using 2D barcodes to carry AI (8200) on general retail trade items, the following specifications are required. For additional barcodes that carry GS1 Digital Link URIs (i.e. QR Code and Data Matrix), see Table 5-46 Symbol specification table 1 addendum 2 for 2D barcodes.

Table 5-45 GS1 symbol specification table 1 addendum 1 for AI (8200)

Symbol(s) specified	X-dimension mm (inches)	Minimum symbol height for given X mm (inches)	Quiet Zone	Minimum
quality
specification
Minimum	Target	Maximum	For minimum X- dimension	For target X- dimension	For	Surrounding Symbol
maximum
X-
dimension
GS1 DataMatrix (ECC 200) (*)	0.396 (0.0150")	0.495 (0.0195")	0.743 (0.0293”)	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	1.5/12/660
GS1 QR Code (*)	0.396 (0.0150")	0.495 (0.0195")	0.743 (0.0293”)	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	4X on all four sides	1.5/12/660

(*) 2D X-dimension - Optical effects in the image capture process require that the GS1 DataMatrix and GS1 QR Code symbols be printed at 1.5 times the equivalent X-dimension allowed for linear symbols.

Figure 5-48 provides the size and quality criteria for 2D barcodes used on retail consumer trade items scanned at POS. The use of these barcodes SHALL be in addition to a 1D barcode required for retail POS. Note: Application Standard Profiles in section 8 provide information on conformance requirements for future use of 2D barcodes at retail POS without a mandatory 1D barcode.

Table 5-46 Symbol specification table 1 addendum 2 for 2D barcodes

Symbol(s) specified	X-dimension mm (inches)	Minimum symbol height for given X mm (inches)	Quiet Zone	Minimum
quality
specification
Minimum	Target	Maximum	For minimum X- dimension	For target X- dimension	For	Surrounding Symbol
maximum
X-
dimension
GS1 DataMatrix (ECC 200) (*)	0.396 (0.0150")	0.495 (0.0195")	0.990 (0.0390”)	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	1.5/12/660
Data Matrix (GS1 Digital Link URI) (ECC 200) () (*)	0.396 (0.0150")	0.495 (0.0195")	0.990 (0.0390”)	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	1.5/12/660
QR Code (GS1 Digital Link URI) () (*)	0.396 (0.0150")	0.495 (0.0195")	0.990 (0.0390”)	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	4X on all four sides	1.5/12/660

(*) 2D X-dimension - Optical effects in the image capture process require that the Data Matrix and QR Code symbols be printed at 1.5 times the equivalent X-dimension allowed for linear symbols.

(**) GS1 Digital Link URI syntax SHALL use the uncompressed form. Note: The dimensional and quality specifications in Table 5-46 reflect the requirements within a read range typical of mobile device scanning of consumer trade item packaging.

Note: For trading partners with the ability to scan and process GTIN encoded in GS1 DataMatrix or GS1 QR Code barcodes for variable measure fresh food trade items, a minimum X-dimension of 0.375 mm (0.0148 inches) is permitted and SHALL be done through mutual agreement.

5.12.3.2 Symbol specification table 2 - Trade items scanned in general distribution only

Table 5-47 GS1 symbol specification table 2

Symbol(s) specified	(*) X-dimension mm (inches)	(**) Minimum symbol height for given X mm (inches)	Quiet Zone	(***) Minimum quality specification
Minimum	Target	Maximum	For	For target X- dimension	For	Left	Right
minimum	maximum
X-	X-
dimension	dimension
EAN-13	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	34.28 (1.350")	45.70 (1.800")	45.70 (1.800")	11X	7X	1.5/10/660
UPC-A	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	34.28 (1.350")	45.70 (1.800")	45.70 (1.800")	9X	9X	1.5/10/660
UPC-E	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	34.28 (1.350")	45.70 (1.800")	45.70 (1.800")	9X	7X	1.5/10/660
ITF-14	0.495 (0.0195")	0.495 (0.0195")	1.016 (0.0400")	31.75 (1.250")	31.75 (1.250")	31.75 (1.250")	10X	10X	1.5/10/660
GS1-128	0.495 (0.0195")	0.495 (0.0195")	1.016 (0.0400")	31.75 (1.250")	31.75 (1.250")	31.75 (1.250")	10X	10X	1.5/10/660
GS1 DataBar Omni- directional	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	16.34 (0.644”)	21.78 (0.858”)	21.78 (0.858”)	None	None	1.5/10/660
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omni- directional	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	34.16 (1.346”)	45.54 (1.794”)	45.54 (1.794”)	None	None	1.5/10/660
GS1 DataBar Expanded	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	16.83 (0.663”)	22.44 (0.884”)	22.44 (0.884”)	None	None	1.5/10/660
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	35.15 (1.385”)	46.86 (1.846”)	46.86 (1.846”)	None	None	1.5/10/660
GS1 DataBar Stacked	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	6.44 (0.254”)	8.58 (0.338”)	8.58 (0.338”)	None	None	1.5/10/660
GS1 DataBar Limited	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	4.95 (0.195”)	6.60 (0.260”)	6.60 (0.260”)	None	None	1.5/10/660
GS1 DataBar Truncated	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	6.44 (0.254”)	8.58 (0.338”)	8.58 (0.338”)	None	None	1.5/10/660
GS1 DataMatrix (ECC 200) (****)	0.743 (0.0292)	0.743 (0.0292”)	1.50 (0.0591)	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	1.5/20/660
GS1 QR Code (****)	0.743 (0.0292)	0.743 (0.0292)	1.50 (0.0591)	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	4X on all four sides	1.5/20/660

(*) UPC-E symbols are designed for use on small packages. Whenever space permits, UPC-A, EAN-13, ITF-14, or GS1-128 symbols SHOULD be used in the general distribution scanning environment.

The minimum symbol height dimensions listed for all symbologies including EAN/UPC symbols do not include the human readable interpretation (or bearer bars for ITF-14 symbols). The minimum heights of EAN/UPC symbols do not include the extended bars: see section 5.2.3.2 for dimensions of the extended bars. Because of the operative scanning environment for EAN/UPC symbols, there is a direct relationship between the symbol’s height and width. This means the minimum symbol height is tied to the minimum, target and maximum X-dimension listed.

ITF-14 symbols with X-dimensions below 0.635 millimetre (0.0250 inch) SHOULD NOT be printed directly on corrugate with conventional (plate-based) processes. The ITF-14 symbol’s bar width ratio target is 2.5:1 and the acceptable range is 2.25:1 to 3:1.

GS1-128 symbols have a maximum symbol length of 165.10 millimetres (6.500 inch), which may impact the maximum achievable X-dimension. For example, a GS1-128 symbol containing an SSCC has a maximum achievable X-dimension for 0.940 millimetre (0.0370 inch).

For GS1-128 and ITF-14, a smaller X-Dimension may be used if there is absolutely no possibility of printing the minimum size barcode because the trade item is physically too small; the X-Dimension SHALL NOT be less than 0.250 millimetre (0.0098 inch). For details on barcode production and quality assessment see section 5.12.

(**) For GS1-128 and ITF-14 symbols the minimum symbol height for General distribution scanning is always 31.75 millimetres (1.250 inch). The minimum symbol height dimensions relate to the bar heights only (do not include human readable interpretation text or ITF-14 symbol bearer bars).

If the trade item is physically too small to accommodate the minimum, for GS1-128 and ITF-14 the minimum height can be reduced to 12.70 millimetres (0.500 inch) or in case of further space constraints to no less than 5.08 millimetres (0.200 inch). For details on barcode production and quality assessment see section 5.12.

There is no maximum for the height, but if the maximum X-dimension is used, the symbol height must be equal to or greater than those listed in the Minimum Symbol Height column. (***) For ITF-14 symbols printed on labels with off-set, thermal, or laser print with an X-dimension 0.495 millimetre (0.0195 inch), the minimum quality specification is 1.5/10/660. For ITF-14 symbols printed directly on corrugate or labels with an X-dimension greater than or equal to 0.635 millimetre (0.0250 inch), the minimum quality specification is 0.5/20/660.

(****) 2D X-dimension - Optical effects in the image capture process require that the GS1 DataMatrix and GS1 QR Code symbols be printed at 1.5 times the equivalent printing X-dimension allowed for linear symbols.

Note: See section 2.7 to ensure the correct symbol specification table is used.

5.12.3.3 Symbol specification table 3 - Trade items scanned at general retail POS and general

distribution

Table 5-48 GS1 symbol specification table 3

Symbol(s) specified	(*) X-dimension mm (inches)	(**) Minimum symbol height for	Quiet Zone	Minimum
given X	quality
mm (inches)	specification
Minimum	Target	Maximum	For	For target X- dimension	For maximum X-dimension	Left	Right
minimum
X-
dimension
EAN-13	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	34.28 (1.350")	45.70 (1.800")	45.70 (1.800")	11X	7X	1.5/06/660
EAN-8	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	27.35 (1.077")	36.46 (1.435")	36.46 (1.435")	7X	7X	1.5/06/660
UPC-A	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	34.28 (1.350")	45.70 (1.800")	45.70 (1.800")	9X	9X	1.5/06/660
UPC-E	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	34.28 (1.350")	45.70 (1.800")	45.70 (1.800")	9X	7X	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Omni- directional (***)	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	22.77 (0.897”)	30.36 (1.196”)	30.36 (1.196”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omni- directional (***)	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	47.03 (1.853”)	62.70 (2.470”)	62.70 (2.470”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Expanded	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	16.83 (0.663”)	22.44 (0.884”)	22.44 (0.884”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	35.15 (1.385”)	46.86 (1.846”)	46.86 (1.846”)	None	None	1.5/06/660

(*) UPC-E and EAN-8 symbols are designed for use on small packages. Whenever space permits, UPC-A and EAN- 13 symbols SHOULD be used. (**) The minimum symbol height dimensions listed for all symbologies including EAN/UPC symbols do not include the human readable interpretation. The minimum heights of EAN/UPC symbols do not include the extended bars: see section 5.2.3.2 for dimensions of the extended bars. Because of the operative scanning environment for EAN/UPC symbols, there is a direct relationship between the symbol’s height and width. This means the minimum symbol height listed is tied to the minimum, target and maximum X-dimension listed.

There is no maximum for the height, but if the maximum X-dimension is used, the symbol height must be equal to or greater than those listed in the Minimum Symbol Height column. (***) The current symbol specification for GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (minimum height 33X) and GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional (minimum height 69X) indicate a square aspect ratio for the symbol segments. To enhance scanning performance, in an omnidirectional scanning environment, an over square aspect ratio SHALL be used following the example of the EAN/UPC symbology specification and rigorous field test of the GS1 DataBar symbology (46X or 95X).

Note: See section 2.7 to ensure the correct symbol specification table is used.

Table 5-49 provides the size and quality criteria for 2D barcodes used on retail consumer trade items scanned at POS and in general distribution. The use of these barcodes SHALL be in addition to a 1D barcode required for retail POS and general distribution scanning. Note: Application Standard Profiles in section 8 provide information on conformance requirements for future use of 2D barcodes at retail POS without a mandatory 1D barcode.

Table 5-49 Symbol specification table 3 addendum 1 for 2D barcodes

Symbol(s) specified	X-dimension mm (inches)	Minimum symbol height for given X mm (inches)	Quiet Zone	Minimum
quality
specification
Minimum	Target	Maximum	For	For target X- dimension	For	Surrounding Symbol
minimum	maximum
X-	X-
dimension	dimension
GS1 DataMatrix (ECC 200) (*)	0.743 (0.0292)	0.990 (0.0390”)	0.990 (0.0390”)	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	1.5/20/660
Data Matrix (GS1 Digital Link URI) (ECC 200) () (*)	0.743 (0.0292)	0.990 (0.0390”)	0.990 (0.0390”)	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	1.5/20/660
QR Code (GS1 Digital Link URI) () (*)	0.743 (0.0292)	0.990 (0.0390”)	0.990 (0.0390”)	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	4X on all four sides	1.5/20/660
(*) 2D X-dimension - Optical effects in the image capture process require that the Data Matrix and QR Code symbols be printed at 1.5 times the equivalent X-dimension allowed for linear symbols.
(**) GS1 Digital Link URI syntax SHALL use the uncompressed form.

5.12.3.4 Symbol specification table 4 – Trade items not scanned at POS or general retail - also not

scanned in general distribution or regulated healthcare (retail or non-retail)

Table 5-50 GS1 symbol specification table 4

Symbol(s) specified	(*) X-dimension mm (inches)	(**) Minimum symbol height for given X mm (inches)	Quiet Zone	Minimum
quality
specification
Minimum	Target	Maximum	For	For target X- dimension	For maximum X-dimension	Left	Right
minimum
X-
dimension
EAN-13	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.28 (0.720")	22.85 (0.900")	45.70 (1.800")	11X	7X	1.5/06/660
EAN-8	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	14.58 (0.574")	18.23 (0.718")	36.46 (1.435")	7X	7X	1.5/06/660
UPC-A	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.28 (0.720")	22.85 (0.900")	45.70 (1.800")	9X	9X	1.5/06/660
UPC-E	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.28 (0.720")	22.85 (0.900")	45.70 (1.800")	9X	7X	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Omni- directional	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	8.71 (0.343")	10.90 (0.429")	21.78 (0.858”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omni- directional	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.24 (0.718")	27.78 (1.094")	45.54 (1.794”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Expanded	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	8.99 (0.354")	11.23 (0.442")	22.44 (0.883”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.75 (0.738")	23.44 (0.923")	46.86 (1.845”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Stacked	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	3.43 (0.135”)	4.29 (0.169”)	8.58 (0.338”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Limited	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	2.64 (0.104”)	3.30 (0.130”)	6.60 (0.260”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Truncated	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	3.43 (0.135”)	4.29 (0.169”)	8.58 (0.338”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
ITF-14	0.250 (0.00984" )	0.495 (0.0195")	0.495 (0.0195")	12.70 (0.500")	12.70 (0.500")	12.70 (0.500")	10X	10X	1.5/06/660
GS1- 128	0.250 (0.00984" )	0.495 (0.0195")	0.495 (0.0195")	12.70 (0.500")	12.70 (0.500")	12.70 (0.500")	10X	10X	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataMatrix (ECC 200) (***)	0.375 (0.0148")	0.495 (0.0195")	0.990 (0.0390")	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	1.5/08/660
GS1 QR Code (***)	0.375 (0.0148")	0.495 (0.0195")	0.990 (0.0390")	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	4X on all four sides	1.5/08/660

(*) ITF-14 symbols with X-dimensions below 0.635 millimetre (0.0250 inch) SHOULD NOT be printed directly on corrugate with conventional (plate based) processes. The ITF-14 symbol’s bar width ratio target is 2.5:1 and the acceptable range is 2.25:1 to 3:1.

Section 5.12.6 gives full details on when barcodes can be printed at less than the minimum X-dimension. In general, barcodes may only be printed using an X-dimension below 0.264 millimetre (0.0104 inch) or 80 percent magnification under the following conditions:

 The allowance for X-dimensions between 0.249 millimetre (0.0098 inch) or 75 percent magnification and 0.264 millimetre (0.0104 inch) or 80 percent magnification is only applicable to on demand (e.g., thermal, laser) print processes. For all other printing processes, an X-dimension of 0.264 millimetre (0.0104 inch) is attainable and is the minimum allowable size.

 When printing a minimum symbol with any method of printing, the area provided for printing the symbol and the required Quiet Zone should never be less than the area required for an X-dimension of 0.264 millimetre (0.0104 inch).

 When printing a minimum symbol with any method of printing, the symbol height SHALL NOT be truncated. (**) The minimum symbol height dimensions listed for all symbologies including EAN/UPC symbols do not include the human readable interpretation (or bearer bars for ITF-14 symbols), The minimum heights of EAN/UPC symbols do not include the extended bars: see section 5.2.3.2 for dimensions of the extended bars.

Because of the operative scanning environment for EAN/UPC symbols, there is a direct relationship between the symbol’s height and width. This means the minimum symbol height listed is tied to the minimum, target and maximum X-dimension listed.

The minimum bar height for ITF-14 and GS1-128 symbols in this operative scanning environment is 12.70 millimetres (0.500 inch), but if the package is physically too small to accommodate this rule, further truncation is permitted. In no case SHALL the bar height be less than 5.08 millimetres (0.200 inch).

There is no maximum for the symbol height, but if the maximum X-dimension is used, the symbol height must be equal to or greater than those listed in the Minimum Symbol Height column.

Whereas, linear symbol heights are set at a fixed dimension, Composite Components are printed at the same X- dimension as the linear portion of the Composite symbology and the barcode height varies depending on the amount of data, the X-dimension and which linear symbol is used in conjunction with the Composite Component.

Note that Composite Components have to be printed with a linear symbol such as GS1 DataBar, GS1-128, UPC- A, or EAN-13. ITF-14 cannot be used with Composite Components. (***) 2D X-dimension - Optical effects in the image capture process require that the GS1 DataMatrix and GS1 QR Code symbols be printed at 1.5 times the equivalent printing X-dimension allowed for linear symbols.

Note: See section 2.7 to ensure the correct symbol specification table is used.

5.12.3.5 Symbol specification table 5 – logistic units scanned in general distribution

Table 5-51 GS1 symbol specification table 5

Symbol(s)	(*) X-dimension	(**) Minimum symbol height for given X	Quiet Zone	Minimum quality
specified	mm (inches)	mm (inches)	specification
Minimum	Target	Maximum	For	For target X- dimension	For maximum X-dimension	Left	Right
minimum
X-
dimension
GS1-128	0.495 (0.0195")	0.495 (0.0195")	0.940 (0.0370")	31.75 (1.250")	31.75 (1.250")	31.75 (1.250")	10X	10X	1.5/10/660
GS1 DataMatrix (ECC 200)	0.743 (0.0292)	0.743 (0.0292”)	1.50 (0.0591)	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	1.5/20/660
GS1 QR Code	0.743 (0.0292)	0.743 (0.0292)	1.50 (0.0591)	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	4X on all four sides	1.5/20/660

(*) If the logistic unit is physically too small to accommodate the minimum X-dimension, the minimum X- dimension is 0.250 millimetre (0.0098 inch). For details on barcode production and quality assessment see section 5.12.

(**) The minimum symbol height indicated is for bar height only and does not include the human readable interpretation. If the logistic unit is physically too small to accommodate the minimum, the minimum bar height is the greater of 15 percent of the symbol width including Quiet Zones or 12.70 millimetres (0.500 inch). If the package is physically too small to accommodate this rule, further truncation is permitted, but in no case SHALL the bar height be less than 5.08 millimetres (0.200 inch). For details on barcode production and quality assessment see section 5.12.

There is no maximum for the height, but if the maximum X-dimension is used, the symbol height must be equal to or greater than those listed in the Minimum Symbol Height column. Note: See section 2.7 to ensure the correct symbol specification table is used.

5.12.3.6 Symbol specification table 6 - Regulated healthcare non-retail consumer trade items not

scanned in general distribution

Table 5-52 GS1 symbol specification table 6

Symbol(s)	X-dimension	Minimum symbol height for given X	Quiet Zone	Minimum quality
specified	mm (inches)	mm (inches)	specification
Minimum	Target	Maximum	For	For target X- dimension	For	Left	Right
minimum	maximum
X-	X-
dimension	dimension
GS1-128	0.170 (0.0067")	0.495 (0.0195")	0.495 (0.0195")	12.70 (0.500")	12.70 (0.500")	12.70 (0.500")	10X	10X	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataMatrix (ECC 200)	0.254 (0.0100")	0.380 (0.0150")	0.990 (0.0390”)	Height is determined by X- dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	1.5/08/660
GS1 DataBar Omni- directional	0.170 (0.0067")	0.200 (0.0080")	0.660 (0.0260")	5.61 (0.221")	6.60 (0.260")	21.78 (0.858”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Truncated	0.170 (0.0067")	0.200 (0.0080")	0.660 (0.0260")	2.21 (0.087")	2.60 (0.102")	8.58 (0.338”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Stacked	0.170 (0.0067")	0.200 (0.0080")	0.660 (0.0260")	2.21 (0.087")	2.60 (0.102")	8.58 (0.338”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omni- directional	0.170 (0.0067")	0.200 (0.0080")	0.660 (0.0260")	11.73 (0.462")	13.80 (0.543")	45.54 (1.794”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Limited	0.170 (0.0067")	0.200 (0.0080")	0.660 (0.0260")	1.70 (0.067")	2.00 (0.079")	6.60 (0.260”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Expanded	0.170 (0.0067")	0.200 (0.0080")	0.660 (0.0260")	5.78 (0.228")	6.80 (0.268")	22.44 (0.884”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked	0.170 (0.0067")	0.200 (0.0080")	0.660 (0.0260")	12.07 (0.475")	14.20 (0.559")	46.86 (1.846”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
EAN-13	0.170 (0.0067")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.28 (0.720")	22.85 (0.900")	45.70 (1.800")	11X	7X	1.5/06/660
EAN-8	0.170 (0.0067")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	14.58 (0.574")	18.23 (0.718")	36.46 (1.435")	7X	7X	1.5/06/660
UPC-A	0.170 (0.0067")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.28 (0.720")	22.85 (0.900")	45.70 (1.800")	9X	9X	1.5/06/660
UPC-E	0.170 (0.0067")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.28 (0.720")	22.85 (0.900")	45.70 (1.800")	9X	7X	1.5/06/660
ITF-14	0.170 (0.0067")	0.495 (0.0195")	0.495 (0.0195")	12.70 (0.500")	12.70 (0.500")	12.70 (0.500")	10X	10X	1.5/06/660
CC-A	All CCs need to be printed at the same X-dimensions as their linear components, therefore consult the appropriate row and column for the linear symbol to be used.	Height is determined by X- dimension and data that is encoded.	1X	1X	1.5/06/660
CC-B	1X	1X	1.5/06/660
CC-C	2X	2X	1.5/06/660

Note: See section 2.7 to ensure the correct symbol specification table is used. Note: This table contains several symbol options. All are permitted to promote backward compatibility, but section 2 application standards define which symbols are the preferred options for the future.

5.12.3.7 Symbol specification table 7 - Direct part marking

Table 5-53 GS1 symbol specification table 7

Symbol(s) specified	X-dimension mm (inches) Note 1 Note 4	Minimum symbol height for	Quiet Zone	Minimum
given X	quality
mm (inches)	specification
Minimum	Target	Maximum	For minimum, Target and Maximum X-dimension
GS1 DataMatrix	0.254 (0.0100”)	0.300 (0.0118”)	0.615 (0.0242”)	Height is determined by X- dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	1.5/06/660 Note 3	For direct marking
of items other
than medical
devices
GS1 QR Code	0.254 (0.0100”)	0.300 (0.0118”)	0.615 (0.0242”)	Height is determined by X- dimension and data that is encoded	4X on all four sides	1.5/06/660 Note 3	For direct marking
of items other
than medical
devices
GS1 DataMatrix Ink Based direct part marking	0.254 (0.0100”)	0.300 (0.0118”)	0.615 (0.0242”)	Height is determined by X- dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	1.5/08/660 Note 3	For direct marking
of medical devices
such as small
medical/surgical
instruments
GS1 DataMatrix direct part marking - A Note 2	0.100 (0.0039”)	0.200 (0.0079”)	0.300 (0.0118”)	Height is determined by X- dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	DPM1.5/04-	For direct marking
12/650/(45Q	of medical devices
\|30Q\|30T\|30	such as small
S\|90)	medical/surgical
Note 5	instruments
GS1 DataMatrix direct part marking - B Note 2	0.200 (0.0079")	0.300 (0.0118”)	0.495 (0.0195")	Height is determined by X- dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	DPM1.5/08-	For direct marking of small medical/surgical instruments	For direct marking
20/650/(45Q	of small
\|30Q\|30T\|30	medical/surgical
S\|90)	instruments
Note 5

Note: The largest X-dimension in a given range that will allow a symbol with the needed data content to fit within the available marking area should be used to maximise marking and reading performance (depth of field, tolerance to curvature, etc.).

The angle is an additional parameter defining the angle of incidence (relative to the plane of the symbol) of the illumination for direct part marking verification. It SHALL be included in the overall symbol grade when the angle of incidence is other than 45 degrees. Its absence indicates that the angle of incidence is 45 degrees. See ISO/IEC 15415 and ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM).

In small instrument marking, mixed marking technologies used within the same scanning environment should be avoided to ensure highest reading performance. Laser etching is recommended for small instrument marking.

Note 1: Optical effects in the image capture process require that label based GS1 DataMatrix and GS1 QR Code symbols be printed at approximately 1.5 times the equivalent X-dimension allowed for linear symbols in the same application.

Note 2: There are two basic types of non ink based direct part marks, those with “connected modules” in the “L” shaped finder pattern (GS1 DataMatrix direct part marking – A) created by DPM marking technologies such as laser or chemical etching and those with “non connected modules” in the “L” shaped finder pattern (GS1 DataMatrix direct part marking – B) created by DPM marking technologies such as dot peen. Due to the marking technologies and characteristics of reading they each have varied ranges of X-dimensions and different quality criteria recommended and may require different reading equipment.

GS1 DataMatrix – A is suggested for marking of medical devices such as small medical/surgical instruments. The Minimum X-dimension of 0.100mm is based upon the specific need for permanence in direct marking of small medical instruments which have limited marking area available on the instrument with a target useable area of 2.5mm x 2.5mm and a data content of GTIN (AI 01) plus serial number (AI 21).

Note 3: The effective aperture for GS1 DataMatrix and GS1 QR Code quality measurements SHOULD be taken at 80 percent of the minimum X-dimension allowed for the application. For direct part marking - A this would equate to an aperture of 3; for direct part marking – B this would equate to an aperture of 6 and for general healthcare label printing, an aperture of 8.

See ISO/IEC 15415 and ISO/IEC TR 29158. Note 4: In practical application, where very small symbol sizes are needed, it may be necessary to work with GS1 DataMatrix module X-dimensions smaller than those suggested.

Where dimensional restrictions prohibit the application of a full size code, reduced X- dimension AIDC marking is encouraged to facilitate information capture. It should be noted that these practices may limit the symbol effectiveness, including but not limited to:

the effect of smaller X-dimensions on reading performance,
the need for, and limited availability of, special scanners/imagers for reading,
special processes for marking,
the overall cost considerations.

These smaller X-dimensions should therefore only be used internally or by mutual agreement between trading partners Note 5: Any “GS1 DataMatrix direct part marking – A” mark that meets the grade requirements under the quality techniques specified in ISO/IEC 15415 is considered acceptable.

If the letters “DPM” precede the grade it indicates that the grade was obtained by following ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM) and not ISO/IEC 15415, regardless whether it is GS1 DataMatrix direct part marking of type A or B.

5.12.3.8 Symbol specification table 8 - Trade items scanned in retail pharmacy and general

distribution or non-retail pharmacy and general distribution

Table 5-54 GS1 symbol specification table 8

Symbol(s)	X-dimension	Minimum symbol height for given X	Quiet Zone	Minimum
quality
specified	mm (inches)	mm (inches)
specification
Minimum	Target	Maximum	For	For target X- dimension	For	Left	Right
minimum	maximum
X-	X-
dimension	dimension
GS1- 128	0.495 (0.0195")	0.495 (0.0195")	1.016 (0.0400")	31.75 (1.250")	31.75 (1.250")	31.75 (1.250")	10X	10X	1.5/10/660
GS1 DataMatrix (ECC 200) (*)	0.750 (0.0300")	0.750 (0.0300")	1.520 (0.0600")	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	1.5/20/660
EAN-13	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	34.28 (1.350")	45.70 (1.800")	45.70 (1.800")	11X	7X	1.5/10/660
EAN-8	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	27.35 (1.077")	36.46 (1.435")	36.46 (1.435")	7X	7X	1.5/10/660
UPC-A	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	34.28 (1.350")	45.70 (1.800")	45.70 (1.800")	9X	9X	1.5/10/660
UPC-E	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	34.28 (1.350")	45.70 (1.800")	45.70 (1.800")	9X	7X	1.5/10/660
ITF-14	0.495 (0.0195")	0.495 (0.0195")	1.016 (0.0400")	31.75 (1.250")	31.75 (1.250")	31.75 (1.250")	10X	10X	1.5/10/660
GS1 DataBar Omni- directional	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	16.34 (0.644”)	21.78 (0.858”)	21.78 (0.858”)	None	None	1.5/10/660
GS1 DataBar Truncated	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	6.44 (0.254”)	8.58 (0.338”)	8.58 (0.338”)	None	None	1.5/10/660
GS1 DataBar Stacked	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	6.44 (0.254”)	8.58 (0.338”)	8.58 (0.338”)	None	None	1.5/10/660
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omni- directional	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	34.16 (1.346”)	45.54 (1.794”)	45.54 (1.794”)	None	None	1.5/10/660
GS1 DataBar Limited	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	4.95 (0.195”)	6.60 (0.260”)	6.60 (0.260”)	None	None	1.5/10/660
GS1 DataBar Expanded	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	16.83 (0.663”)	22.44 (0.884”)	22.44 (0.884”)	None	None	1.5/10/660
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked	0.495 (0.0195")	0.660 (0.0260")	0.660 (0.0260")	35.15 (1.385”)	46.86 (1.846”)	46.86 (1.846”)	None	None	1.5/10/660
CC-A	All CCs need to be printed at the same X- dimensions as their linear components, therefore consult the appropriate row and column for the linear symbol to be used.	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded.	1X	1X	1.5/10/660
CC-B	1X	1X	1.5/10/660
CC-C	2X	2X	1.5/10/660

(*) 2D X-dimension - Optical effects in the image capture process require that the GS1 DataMatrix and GS1 QR Code symbols be printed at 1.5 times the equivalent printing X-dimension allowed for linear symbols.

Note: Since June 2007 GS1 has recommended all trading partners in the healthcare sector invest exclusively in imaging-based scanners. Now that GS1 DataMatrix has been approved within the standard, it is important to inform all trading partners of a process within GS1 to establish target deployment dates. Without these dates, brand owners do not have a way to know when to deploy GS1 DataMatrix on their packaging and those needing to invest in scanning equipment may inadvertently purchase equipment that will not support the standards. To see GS1 healthcare’s position paper on GS1 DataMatrix adoption, visit https://www.gs1.org/healthcare.

5.12.3.9 Symbol specification table 9 - GS1 keys GDTI, GRAI, GIAI and GLN

Table 5-55 GS1 symbol specification table 9

Symbol(s)	X-dimensions mm(inches)	Minimum symbol height for given X mm(inches	Quiet Zone	Minimum quality specification
specified
Minimum	Target	Maximum	For	For target X- dimension	For	Left	Right
minimum	maximum
X- dimension	X- dimension
GS1- 128	0.250 (0.0098")	0.250 (0.009 8")	0.495 (0.0195")	12.70 (0.500")	12.70 (0.500")	12.70 (0.500")	10X	10X	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataMatrix (ECC 200) (*)	0.375 (0.0148")	0.375 (0.014 8")	0.743 (0.0293")	Height is determined by X- dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	1.5/08/660
GS1 QR Code (*)	0.375 (0.0148")	0.375 (0.014 8")	0.743 (0.0293")	Height is determined by X- dimension and data that is encoded	4X on all four sides	1.5/08/660

Note: For location marking, barcodes may be printed at a higher maximum X-dimension: GS1-128 at 1.016 mm (0.0400 inches), GS1 DataMatrix and GS1 QR Code at 1.520 mm (0.0600 inches). See section 2.4.2.

5.12.3.10 Symbol specification table 10 – Regulated healthcare retail consumer trade items not scanned in general distribution

Table 5-56 GS1 symbol specification table 10

Symbol(s) specified	X-dimension mm (inches)	Minimum symbol height for given X mm (inches)	Quiet Zone	Minimum
quality
specification
Minimum (*)	Target	Maximum	For	For target X- dimension	For	Left	Right
minimum	maximum
X-	X-
dimension	dimension
GS1- 128	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	12.70 (0.500")	12.70 (0.500")	12.70 (0.500")	10X	10X	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataMatrix (ECC 200) (**)	0.396 (0.0156")	0.495 (0.0195")	0.990 (0.0390")	Height is determined by X- dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	1.5/08/660
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	8.71 (0.343")	10.89 (0.429")	21.78 (0.858)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Truncated	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	3.43 (0.135")	4.29 (0.169")	8.58 (0.338”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Stacked	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	3.43 (0.135")	4.29 (0.169")	8.58 (0.338”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.22 (0.718")	27.77 (0.897")	45.54 (1.794”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Limited	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	2.64 (0.104")	3.30 (0.130")	6.60 (0.260”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Expanded	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	8.98 (0.354")	11.22 (0.442")	22.44 (0.883”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.74 (0.738")	23.43 (0.923")	46.86 (1.846”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
EAN-13	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.28 (0.720")	22.85 (0.900")	45.70 (1.800")	11X	7X	1.5/06/660
EAN-8	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	14.58 (0.574")	18.23 (0.718")	36.46 (1.435")	7X	7X	1.5/06/660
UPC-A	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.28 (0.720")	22.85 (0.900")	45.70 (1.800")	9X	9X	1.5/06/660
UPC-E	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.28 (0.720")	22.85 (0.900")	45.70 (1.800")	9X	7X	1.5/06/660
ITF-14	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	12.70 (0.500")	12.70 (0.500")	12.70 (0.500")	10X	10X	1.5/06/660
CC-A	All CCs need to be printed at the same X- dimensions as their linear components, therefore consult the appropriate row and column for the linear symbol to be used.	Height is determined by X- dimension and data that is encoded.	1X	1X	1.5/06/660
CC-B	1X	1X	1.5/06/660
CC-C	2X	2X	1.5/06/660

 When printing a minimum symbol with any method of printing, the symbol height SHALL NOT be truncated below the minimum. (**) 2D X-dimension - Optical effects in the image capture process require that the GS1 DataMatrix and GS1 QR Code symbols be printed at 1.5 times the equivalent printing X-dimension allowed for linear symbols.

Note: See section 2.7 to ensure the correct symbol specification table is used. Note: Since June 2007 GS1 has recommended all trading partners in the healthcare sector invest exclusively in imaging-based scanners. Now that GS1 DataMatrix has been approved within the standard, it is important to inform all trading partners of a process within GS1 to establish target deployment dates. Without these dates, brand owners do not have a way to know when to deploy GS1 DataMatrix on their packaging and those needing to invest in scanning equipment may inadvertently purchase equipment that will not support the standards. To see GS1 Healthcare’s Position Paper on GS1 DataMatrix adoption, visit https://www.gs1.org/healthcare.

5.12.3.11 Symbol specification table 11 – GS1 GSRNs

Table 5-57 GS1 symbol specification table 11

Symbol(s) specified	X-dimensions mm(inches)	Minimum symbol height for given X mm (inches)	Quiet Zone	Minimum
quality
specification
Minimum	Target	Maximum	For	For target X- dimension	For	Left	Right
minimum	maximum
X- dimension	X- dimension
GS1 DataBar Expanded (*)	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	8.99 (0.354”)	11.23 (0.442”)	22.44 (0.883”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked (*)	0.264 (0.0104")	0.330 (0.0130")	0.660 (0.0260")	18.75 (0.738”)	23.44 (0.923”)	46.86 (1.845”)	None	None	1.5/06/660
GS1-128	0.170 (0.0067")	0.250 (0.0098")	0.495 (0.0195")	12.70 (0.500")	12.70 (0.500")	12.70 (0.500")	10X	10X	1.5/05/660
GS1 DataMatrix (ECC 200) (**)	0.254 (0.0100")	0.380 (0.0150")	0.495 (0.0195")	Height is determined by X- dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	1.5/08/660
GS1 QR Code (**)	0.254 (0.0100")	0.380 (0.0150")	0.495 (0.0195")	Height is determined by X- dimension and data that is encoded	4X on all four sides	1.5/08/660

(*) These dimensions refer to the Symbol Specification Table 1 - Trade items scanned in general retail POS and not general distribution. These barcodes may only be printed using an X-dimension below 0.264 millimetre (0.0104 inch) under the following conditions:

 The allowance for X-dimensions between 0.249 millimetre (0.0098 inch) and 0.264 millimetre (0.0104 inch) is only applicable to on demand (e.g., thermal, laser) print processes. For all other printing processes, an X-dimension of 0.264 millimetre (0.0104 inch) is attainable and is the minimum allowable size.

Furthermore:  The minimum symbol height dimensions listed for all symbologies do not include the human readable interpretation.  When printing a minimum symbol with any method of printing, the bar height SHALL NOT be truncated below the minimum as listed in the table above.

 For GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked symbols, the table reflects the minimum symbol height for symbols that are two rows in height.  For GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked in 2 row and 3 row configurations, the X-dimension may be as low as 0.0080” (0.203mm) as long as a minimum overall bar height of 1.020” (25.91mm) is maintained.

(**) 2D X-dimension - Optical effects in the image capture process require that the GS1 DataMatrix and GS1 QR Code symbols be printed at 1.5 times the equivalent printing X-dimension allowed for linear symbols.

5.12.3.12 Symbol specification table 12 – Tobacco trade items and logistics units for European Regulation 2018/574 on technical standards for the establishment and operation of a traceability system for tobacco products

Table 5-58 GS1 system symbol specification table 12

Symbol(s) specified	(*) X-dimension mm (inches)	(**) Minimum symbol height for given X mm (inches)	Quiet Zone	(****) Minimum quality specification
Minimum	Target	Maximum	For	For target X- dimension	For maximum X-dimension	Left	Right
minimum
X-
dimension
Trade Items at EU 2018/574 Unit Pack Level
GS1 DataMatrix (ECC 200) (*)	0.380 (0.0150")	0.380 (0.0150")	0.990 (0.0390")	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	3.5/08/660
GS1 QR Code () (*)	0.380 (0.0150")	0.380 (0.0150")	0.990 (0.0390")	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	4X on all four sides	3.5/08/660
GS1 DotCode (***)	0.380 (0.0150")	0.380 (0.0150")	0.990 (0.0390")	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	3X on all four sides	3.5/08/660
Trade Item Groupings (unit pack aggregations per at EU 2018/574)
GS1 DataMatrix (ECC 200) (*)	0.750 (0.0295”)	0.750 (0.0295”)	1.520 (0.0600”)	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	3.5/20/660
GS1 QR Code () (*)	0.750 (0.0295”)	0.750 (0.0295”)	1.520 (0.0600”)	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	4X on all four sides	3.5/20/660
GS1-128 (****)	0.495 (0.0195")	0.495 (0.0195")	1.016 (0.0400")	31.75 (1.250”)	10X	10X	3.5/10/660
Logistic units (unit pack aggregations with a transport unit per at EU 2018/574)
GS1 DataMatrix (ECC 200)	0.750 (0.0295")	0.750 (0.0295")	1.520 (0.0600")	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	3.5/20/660
GS1 QR Code ()(*)	0.750 (0.0295")	0.750 (0.0295")	1.520 (0.0600")	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	4X on all four sides	3.5/20/660
GS1-128	0.495 (0.0195")	0.495 (0.0195")	0.940 (0.0370")	31.75 (1.250")	10X	10X	3.5/10/660

(*)	2D X-dimension - Optical effects in the image capture process require that the GS1 DataMatrix and GS1 QR Code symbols be printed at 1.5 times the equivalent printing X-dimension allowed for linear symbols.
(**)	an optical device-readable QR Code with a recovery capacity of approximately 30%. Barcodes conforming to ISO/IEC 18004:2015 with the error correction level H shall be presumed to fulfil the requirements set out in this point.
(***)	an optical device-readable DotCode with the error detection and correction equivalent to or higher than those provided with the Reed-Solomon error correction algorithm with the number of check characters (NC) equal to three plus the number of data characters (ND) divided by two (NC = 3 + ND / 2).
(****)	The minimum quality grade of 3.5 is per the European Regulation 2018/574. It is noted that this quality grade is significantly higher than the typical 1.5 grade required for other symbols in other GS1 application standards.

Note: See section 2.7 to ensure the correct symbol specification table is used. 5.12.3.13 Symbol specification table 13 – Durable labelling and durable marking enabling long distance scanning

Table 5-59 GS1 symbol specification table 13

Symbol(s)	(*) X-dimension	Minimum symbol height for given X	Quiet Zone	Minimum quality
specified	mm (inches)	mm (inches)	specification
Minimum	Maximum	Left	Right
GS1 DataMatrix (ECC 200)	0.495 (0.0195”)	3.50 (0.1378")	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	1X on all four sides	1.5/(**)/660
GS1 QR Code	0.495 (0.0195”)	3.50 (0.1378")	Height is determined by X-dimension and data that is encoded	4X on all four sides	1.5/(**)/660
GS1-128 (****)	0.495 (0.0195")	0.940 (***) (0.0370")	12.70 (0.500")	10X on left and right side	1.5/(**)/660

(*) For optimal reader performance, a limited X-dimension range should be selected. For long distance scanning applications, X-dimensions greater than 1.75 mm (0.069”) should be used.

() For quality measurement of these GS1 symbols, the effective aperture should be 80% of the chosen X- dimension. (*) With an X-dimension at the upper end of the range, GS1-128 symbols have a limited data capacity because the maximum length is 165.10 mm (6.5”). See section 5.4.4.3.

(****) The GS1-128 symbol may not be readable at the same distance as the GS1 DataMatrix and GS1 QR Code. Note: See section 2.7 to ensure the correct symbol specification table is used.

5.12.4 Barcode production

The following subsections will: Provide background on major barcode printing methods and materials.

Provide general printing and packaging background for major application groups.
Provide technical considerations for direct part marking (DPM).
The various definitions and specialist terms used throughout this section are found in ISO/IEC 15419, Information Technology, Automatic Identification and Data Capture Techniques, Bar Code Digital Imaging and Printing Performance Testing, ISO/IEC 15416, Information technology, Automatic Identification and Data Capture Technologies, Bar Code Print Quality Test Specification – Linear Symbols and ISO/IEC 15415, Information technology, Automatic Identification and Data capture Techniques, Bar Code Print Quality Test Specification, Two-dimensional Symbols.

5.12.4.1 Digital imaging

5.12.4.1.1 General requirements General requirements consisting of the following topics are found in section 4 of ISO/IEC 15419. Data input.

Quiet Zones.
Classification of imaging device categories, from informative reference Annex E of ISO/IEC

Programmer’s examples, from informative reference Annex F of ISO/IEC 15419.

Programmer’s example for general-purpose printers.
Programmer’s example for indirect barcode imaging devices.
Programmer’s example for symbols distorted for plate roll circumference.
Direct barcode imaging devices.
Dedicated barcode printers.
Adjustment of target element dimensions.
Record of design elements.
General purpose printers.
Adjusted bar width compensation (BWC) (including the General Purpose Printer Dot/Pixel
Comparison figure).

Record of design attributes.

Indirect barcode imaging devices.
Adjustments for planned distortion (disproportioning).
Adjustments for special EAN/UPC symbol characters.
Test requirements:
System configuration.
Test procedure.
Conformance.
Test report, including sample test layout, from normative reference Annex A of ISO/IEC 15419
Certification.
Software specification, including classification of software categories, from informative reference
Annex D of ISO/IEC 15419 and functions of barcode production software from informative reference Annex G of ISO/IEC 15419. Maintenance and supplies, from informative reference Annex C of ISO/IEC 15419.
5.12.4.1.2

Dedicated barcode printers Section 5 of ISO/IEC 15419 contains information on dedicated barcode printers and includes the following topics: Data input requirements.

Test requirements.
Selection of equipment for testing.
Test conditions; environment, equipment configuration.
Test procedure.
Conformance.
Test report.
Certification and labelling.
Equipment specification.
5.12.4.1.3

EAN/UPC on-demand printed symbols at minimum size In the past the term "magnification factor" was extensively used to specify the size of a barcode. This technique relied upon setting a nominal size (100 percent) that was directly related to a given X-dimension. Since January 2000, the term “X-dimension” has been used to specify permissible symbol sizes (see section 5.12).

It is more difficult for the user to create high quality barcodes with general-purpose printers than it is with direct thermal transfer label printers. There are two reasons for this difficulty. First, the printed dot size for general-purpose printers is appreciably larger than the pixel dimension, as shown in the figure below. This causes the bars (dark bars) to be printed wider and the spaces (light bars) to be narrower than nominal, unless the software driving the printer corrects for this distortion. Second, the software that constructs the barcode may itself introduce dimensional errors.

Pixel-sized dot Typical general-purpose printer dot

Figure 5-69 Example of digital printing

The most common printing densities used by on-demand, barcode printers are 200 and 300 dpi. However, due to the constraints of the dot pitch, these printers cannot print a minimum X- dimension of 0.264 mm (0.0104 inch) or 80 percent magnification symbol correctly. The closest to 80 percent that these printers can print is 75.7 percent or 76.9 percent depending on the exact dot geometry (see Table 5-60).

Even though a minimum X-dimension of 0.264 mm (0.0104) inch or 80 percent magnification) is the minimum value specified, users of on-demand printers have used magnifications between 75 percent and 80 percent in point-of-sale (POS) scanning environments for years. They have done so with no significant reduction in scan rate, as compared to symbols printed precisely at 80 percent.

Because larger in-specification symbols are always easier to scan, 80 percent symbols and larger are preferred. However, when an on-demand printer is required, the 75 to 80 percent symbols are an acceptable alternative given the following qualifications for printing:

The allowance for symbols from the EAN/UPC symbology family of magnifications from 75 to 80

percent is only applicable to on-demand (e.g., thermal, laser) print processes. For all other printing processes, 80 percent is attainable and is the minimum allowable size. When printing a minimum symbol with any method of printing, the area provided for printing
the symbol, including the required Quiet Zones, SHOULD never be less than the area required for an 80 percent symbol. This area is derived from the total width of an 80 percent symbol times its height. When printing a minimum symbol with any method of printing, the symbol height SHALL NOT be
truncated below minimum bar height as stated in the symbol specification tables.

Table 5-60 Achievable X-dimensions for thermal printed EAN/UPC symbols

Reference DPI	Actual DPI	Dots per millimetre	Actual dot width	Dots per module width	Module width (X-dimension)	(*) Corrected magnification
(centre point to
centre point)
inch	mm	inch	mm
200	203.2	8	0.004921	0.12500	2	0.0098	0.250	(**) 75.76%
200	203.2	8	0.004921	0.12500	3	0.0148	0.375	113.64%
200	203.2	8	0.004921	0.12500	4	0.0197	0.500	151.52%
200	203.2	8	0.004921	0.12500	5	0.2461	0.625	189.39%
300	304.8	12	0.003281	0.08333	3	0.0098	0.250	(**) 75.76%
300	304.8	12	0.003281	0.08333	4	0.0131	0.333	100.01%
300	304.8	12	0.003281	0.08333	5	0.0164	0.417	126.26%
300	304.8	12	0.003281	0.08333	6	0.0197	0.500	151.52%
300	304.8	12	0.003281	0.08333	7	0.0230	0.583	176.77%
400	406.4	16	0.002461	0.06250	4	0.0098	0.250	(**) 75.76%
400	406.4	16	0.002461	0.06250	5	0.0123	0.312	94.70%
400	406.4	16	0.002461	0.06250	6	0.0148	0.375	113.64%
400	406.4	16	0.002461	0.06250	7	0.0172	0.437	132.58%
400	406.4	16	0.002461	0.06250	8	0.0197	0.500	151.52%
400	406.4	16	0.002461	0.06250	9	0.0221	0.563	170.45%
400	406.4	16	0.002461	0.06250	10	0.0246	0.625	189.39%
600	609.6	24	0.001640	0.04167	6	0.0098	0.250	(**) 75.76%
600	609.6	24	0.001640	0.04167	7	0.0115	0.292	88.38%
600	609.6	24	0.001640	0.04167	8	0.0131	0.333	101.01%
600	609.6	24	0.001640	0.04167	9	0.0148	0.375	113.64%
600	609.6	24	0.001640	0.04167	10	0.0164	0.417	126.26%
600	609.6	24	0.001640	0.04167	11	0.0180	0.458	138.89%
600	609.6	24	0.001640	0.04167	12	0.0197	0.500	151.52%
600	609.6	24	0.001640	0.04167	13	0.0213	0.542	164.14%
600	609.6	24	0.001640	0.04167	14	0.0230	0.583	176.77%
600	609.6	24	0.001640	0.04167	15	0.0246	0.625	189.39%

(*) The nominal EAN/UPC symbol is based on a module width (X-dimension) of either 0.0130 inch or 0.330 millimetre. In North America, long-standing GS1 US specifications set the nominal module size (X-dimension) at 0.0130 inch or 0.330 millimetres. The ISO/IEC specification for EAN/UPC symbols set the nominal module size (X-dimension) at 0.330 millimetre. The international metric nominal is 0.0606 percent smaller than the original inch-based nominal. The data in the right-most column labelled “Corrected Magnification” are based on a nominal module width (X-dimension) of 0.330 millimetre.

(**) See Table 5-44 for when a magnification of less than 80% is acceptable

5.12.4.2 Barcode master image production

5.12.4.2.1 Introduction For symbols in the EAN/UPC symbology family, the biggest usage of verification has always been in conjunction with printing and production of packaging and labels by means of the conventional or "wet ink" printing processes, such as offset lithography, flexography and photogravure. A barcode master image is required as part of the production of printing plates for these processes.

The first point at which one might use verification is a printability test before actual production of the symbols, where a printing run including a test symbol is carried out under normal conditions.

The test barcode is then verified to characterise the printing process for a particular press and printing substrate. It is necessary to assess how much bar gain (or loss) has occurred and over what range of variation, to decide how much bar width adjustment (BWA) is required. Bar gain will mean that the printed bars are wider than those of the master image, so the master image will need to be adjusted to compensate for this. BWA can be in the form of bar width reduction (BWR), where there is bar gain, or the less common bar width increase (BWI). The required BWA is associated with the X-dimension used. These details are required in order to specify the master image correctly for the barcode origination software.

BAR GAIN

1.0 MM PRIN = 0

0.9 MM PRINT GAIN (G) = 0.1 MM ORIGINAL FILM PRINTED BAR MASTER BAR

Figure 5-70 Example of bar width adjustment

If a proof of the print job is produced, the barcode should be verified as part of the approval process. Note, however, that since proofing presses are not the same as production printing presses, there may be a slight difference in the quality of the proof and the production job.

While the presses are being made ready, a check of bar widths on the first few printed sheets can help to ensure that the press is correctly set to produce near-ideal bar widths. Once the presses have started to roll, periodic sampling should be carried out, at intervals based on experience or dictated by the company's quality control procedures, to monitor both bar widths and other aspects of symbol quality (in particular symbol contrast), since these are the attributes most easily adjusted during the run.

Finally, a further sample should be verified following completion of the print job. The Scan Reflectance Profile (SRP) analysis SHALL be used as the basis for decision making, to ensure that the job has achieved at least the minimum quality grade specified by the customer or based on the application.

The following items are recommended to accompany a master image file: X-dimension (magnification factor).

Selected bar width reduction.
Product identification, including company name.
Printing process for which the master image is intended.
Identification of the master image supplier.
Date of master image manufacture.
5.12.4.2.2

Master image requirements The master image must be produced at an appropriate resolution for the hardware device which will produce the physical image of the barcode on paper, photographic film, printing plate or other substrate. The associated software which converts the input data (the master image) into digital instructions to drive the hardware device is equally important. The general principles and requirements that should be followed are explained in ISO/IEC 15419 Information Technology, Automatic Identification and Data Capture Techniques, Bar Code Digital Imaging and Printing Performance. This international standard sets out general principles governing the barcode image generation function in each component, supplemented by more specific details applicable to certain major categories of software and hardware.

The physical requirements for a film master are found in section 6 of ISO/IEC 15421 Information technology -- Automatic identification and data capture techniques -- Bar code master test specifications.

5.12.4.3 Technical considerations for direct part marking (DPM)

Marking methods It is important to analyse the selected method of marking in relation to several considerations: Finishes that cause an excess of shadowing or glare.

Surfaces that do not provide sufficient contrast - less than 20 percent difference in surface
reflectance.

Safety critical parts that cannot be marked with intrusive methods.

Marking method must comply with the users’ requirements.
Location of the symbol should not be:
In direct air/water (streams, etc.).
On sealing surfaces.
On surfaces subject to wear or exposure to heavy contact.
Intrusive (subtractive methods)

Intrusive marking refers to methods that remove or alter the material of the host. Abrasive blast

Dot peen
Electro-chemical marking, colouring, or etching
Engraving/milling
Fabric embroidery/weaving
Direct laser marking
Laser shot peening
Laser Inducted Surface Improvement (LISI)
Gas Assisted Laser Etch (GALE)
Laser Induced Vapour Deposition (LIVD)
Non-intrusive (additive methods)

Non-Intrusive marking does not affect the host material; it usually involves the addition of material. Cast, forge, mold

Inkjet
Laser bonding
Liquid metal jet
Silk screen
Stencil
Host (substrate) surface

Direct part marking of GS1 DataMatrix or GS1 QR Code SHOULD be reserved for surfaces no rougher than 250 micro inches (millionths of an inch) and for surfaces that are no smoother than 8 micro inches. Surfaces that fall outside these parameters need to be re-surfaced or marked using an alternative method.

Consideration of the surface colour must be taken. A minimum 20 percent difference in contrast between the host and the symbol is required. Altering the cell size in relation to the surface roughness should provide adequate contrast on cast surfaces.

(Cell size = (0.00006 X roughness) + 0.0067)

Table 5-61 Cell size in relation to surface roughness

Average roughness	Cell size minimum
0,508 micrometres (20 micro inches)	0.1905 mm (0.0075 in.)
1,524 micrometres (60 micro inches)	0.2286 mm (0.009 in.)
3,048 micrometres (120 micro inches)	0.381 mm (0.015 in.)
5,08 micrometres (200 micro inches)	0.508 mm (0.020 in.)
7,62 micrometres (300 micro inches)	0.635 mm (0.025 in.)
10,668 micrometres (420 micro inches)	0.762 mm (0.030 in.)

Substrate surface thickness A minimum host surface thickness is recommended as is a maximum marking depth. Both are outlined in the table below.

Table 5-62 Marking depth and surface thickness by method

Method	Min. thickness	Max marking depth
Dot Peen	1.016 mm (0.04 in.)	0.102 mm (0.004 in.)
Laser Shot peening	0.508 mm (0.02 in.)	0.051 mm (0.002 in.)
Laser Bonding	0.025 mm (0.001 in.)	Surface Mark
Abrasive Blast	0.076 mm (0.003 in.)	0.008 mm (0.0003 in.)
Electro-Chemical Colouring	0.508 mm (0.02 in.)	0.051 mm (0.002 in.)
Laser Etch	0.762 mm (0.03 in.)	0.076 mm (0.003 in.)
LISI	1.016 mm (0.04 in.)	0.102 mm (0.004 in.)
Laser Engraving	1.27 mm (0.05 in.)	0.127 mm (0.005 in.)
Electro-Chemical Etch	2.54 mm (0.1 in.)	0.254 mm (0.01 in.)
Micro-Milling	31.75 mm (1.25 in.)	3.175 mm (0.125 in.)

5.12.5 Quality assessment

5.12.5.1 Verification

Verification is the technical process by which a barcode is measured to determine its conformance with the specification for that symbol. Verification is not intended to be used alone as a method for downstream rejection. For example, GS1’s advice is to use the ISO/IEC 15416 or ISO/IEC 15415 methodologies as the basis to improve overall scanning performance. An ISO/IEC-based verifier is of enormous assistance in diagnosing the problem and providing a standard means of reporting among printing companies and their trading partners.

It is also important to note the difference between a scanner and a verifier. A verifier is a measuring tool by which one can make certain determinations concerning the ability of the symbol to do its job, namely, to carry and deliver data on demand.

When interpreting the results from verification it is also important to remember that: Most verifiers do not measure symbol height.

Without additional software linking the decoded data to a database, the quality and accuracy of
the data content of a symbol cannot be confirmed.

The verifier does not check that the human readable interpretation matches the barcode data

(and it is necessary to check that the two correspond, particularly where the barcode generating software does not include human readable interpretation data). Because only a sample of the symbols produced are actually verified, the quality of all the
symbols in a production batch cannot be guaranteed beyond the statistical confidence limits associated with the sampling rate used. Even a perfect symbol at the time of production can be damaged or otherwise affected in its
passage through the supply chain (e.g., scratched, frozen, dampened).

Operator error can cause inconsistent results. Operators should be properly trained and visual

checks should be made to confirm verifier results (e.g., where the barcode is expected to get a good result and fails the verifier test, recheck the operation of using the verifier). The correct barcode has been printed for the scanning environment of the item (e.g., an ITF-14
symbol SHALL NOT be used on an item intended for retail point-of-sale).

5.12.5.1.1 Traditional verification (informative) Traditional verification methods were introduced in the early to mid-1970s and were based on the measurement of two symbol parameters: print contrast signal (PCS) and the bar width deviation. If the bar (or space) widths were within a defined (but somewhat arbitrary) tolerance and if PCS was above a defined minimum value, the symbol was regarded as being "in spec." Initially, none of these measurements were automated and human factors affected the accuracy and consistency of measurements. Also, checking that the symbol was correctly encoded was a laborious task. However, within a few years, instruments were developed that performed these measurements automatically. These were the first true verifiers that enabled the printer to take steps to produce the symbols as nearly perfectly as this process allowed.

Traditional verification does not necessarily give results that correlate very closely with the actual scanning performance of the symbols. One reason is that the assessment of the symbol gives only a single threshold for acceptability: "Pass" or "Fail.” In addition, if the assessment is based on a single scan across the symbol, which might be through an exceptionally good or bad section of the symbol, it cannot be guaranteed to be truly representative of its condition.

Measurements of bar gain or loss are less meaningful in the case of certain symbologies, like the EAN/UPC symbology and the GS1-128 barcode, where decoding relies primarily on edge-to-similar- edge distances, which are relatively immune to even substantial amounts of consistent gain or loss across the symbol. These distances are measured from the leading edge of one bar to the leading edge of the next (or from one trailing edge to the next), which tends to move in the same direction if there is bar gain or loss. A more subtle factor is that the method is not standardised, either as to where the dark and light reflectance (or density) measurements are made for the calculation of PCS, or as to how the exact position of an element edge is defined, so that some models of verifier could assess a given symbol as "Pass” whereas others could “Fail” it – a source of potential and, indeed, actual disagreements among suppliers and customers.

5.12.5.1.2 ISO/IEC verification During the 1980s a group of experts from barcode and user industries working on all types of scanning systems determined the factors that most directly affect symbol-scanning performance and resulted in the analysis of the Scan Reflectance Profile (SRP). This methodology was originally known as ANSI verification because it was first described in the United States' standard ANSI X3.182, published in 1990 under the title Bar Code Print Quality Guidelines. The method was then defined in a European standard (EN 1635), originally published in 1995, and an International Standard (ISO/IEC 15416), originally published in 2000. ISO/IEC 15416 is the definitive international specification of the ISO/IEC linear barcode verification methodology, and the numeric grading system is used.

The method, as described in the ISO/IEC 15416 standard, is technically fully compatible with the ANSI X3.182 and EN 1635 method, so verifiers based on these standards are not obsolete.

ISO/IEC 15415 is the equivalent definitive international standard for two-dimensional barcode symbols, with one methodology applicable to multi-row barcodes and the other to two-dimensional matrix symbols. In addition ISO/IEC TR 29158 Direct Part Mark (DPM) Quality Guideline is relevant when assessing the quality of symbols marked directly to the surface of an item.

In simple terms, an ISO/IEC verifier looks at the symbol in exactly the same way a scanner sees it. The ISO/IEC verifier reports its assessment of the symbol quality not as a single pass or fail decision, but as one of a range of four passing grades (from 4 to 1, in order of decreasing quality) or one failing grade (0). This enables an application to set the most appropriate minimum grade for acceptability. It may be noted that the ANSI standard uses the alphabetic scale A to D for passing grades and F for failing symbols, but the grade thresholds are identical.

The relationship between symbol grades measured in this way and the way the symbols behaved when they were scanned was so close that users rapidly came to accept the SRP assessment method for verifying symbols received from their trading partners. Users knew that as long as a symbol achieved grade 1.5 or better it would give them acceptable performance when they had to scan it to capture the encoded data.

Note: The GS1 system requires that the Quiet Zone be a measured parameter for EAN/UPC Symbology, GS1-128 symbols and ITF-14 symbols per the values expressed in ISO/IEC 15416, section 5. For GS1 DataMatrix it is equal to one X-dimension expressed in ISO/IEC 16022 section 7 and for GS1 QR Code it is equal to four times the X-dimension expressed in ISO/IEC 18004:2015.

5.12.5.1.3 Types of verifiers The ISO/IEC 15426 standard, which is in two parts, defines the test methods and minimum accuracy criteria for verifiers using the methodologies of ISO/IEC 15416 (for linear barcodes) and ISO/IEC 15415 (for multi-row barcodes and two-dimensional barcode symbols). ISO/IEC 15426-1 relates to linear barcode verifiers and ISO/IEC 15426-2 to two-dimensional barcode verifiers.

There are many types of verifier that meet the requirements of ISO/IEC 15426, some that are used in conjunction with a personal computer with special verification software for the symbol analysis and display/printing of results, while others are integrated stand-alone units. In addition, some verifiers may have interchangeable measuring apertures and light sources to enable measurement of symbols with a wide range of X-dimensions and to meet the illumination needs of differing application standards.

5.12.5.2 Measurement methodology

The symbol must be verified in its final configuration wherever possible (e.g., including over- laminate, package material, contents), but if this is not feasible, the following procedure is recommended to allow for the effects of show-through.

Place the symbol to be verified on a flat surface. If the substrate is not opaque (allows light through), perform the verification procedure with the symbol on a dark surface and then repeat it on a light surface. Take the poorer set of results, unless it is known what type of material is likely to back the symbol in practice, in which case attempt to match it.

5.12.5.3 Symbol grading

Symbol Grading for linear symbols consisting of the following topics is found in section 6 of ISO/IEC 15416: Scan Reflectance Profile (SRP) grading (further explained in normative reference Annex B of

ISO/IEC 15416).

Decode.

Reflectance parameter grading (including the Reflectance Parameter Grading figure).
Decodability (including the Decodability Grades figure; also covered in normative reference
Annex A of ISO/IEC 15416).

Expression of symbol grade.

Symbol grading process flowchart is available from normative reference Annex C of ISO/IEC

Guidance on the verification report template is available in section 5.12.7 Barcode verification

template.

Symbol Grading for two dimensional symbols consisting of the following topics can be found in section 5 of ISO/IEC 15415: Expression of quality grades.

Overall Symbol Grade.
Reporting of the Symbol Grade.
Symbology-specific parameters and values for symbol grading (further explained in normative
reference Annex A of ISO/IEC 15415).

Symbology grading flowchart for two-dimensional barcode symbols (further explained in

informative reference Annex B of ISO/IEC 15415).

Guidance on selection of grading parameters in application specification available from

informative reference Annex D of ISO/IEC 15415.

5.12.5.4 Substrate characteristics

Substrate characteristics consisting of the following topics are found in the informative reference Annex D of ISO/IEC 15416 and informative reference Annex E of ISO/IEC 15415 Substrate opacity

Gloss
Over-laminate
Static reflectance measurements
Prediction of symbol contrast
Prediction of minimum edge contrast (Ecmin) and modulation (MOD)
Acceptability of measured and derived values

5.12.5.5 Interpretation of the scan reflectance profile and profile grades

Interpretation of the scan reflectance profile (SRP) and profile grades consisting of the following topics is found in the informative reference Annex E of ISO/IEC 15416 and informative reference Annex C of ISO/IEC 15415:

Significance of SRPs

Interpretation of results
Matching grades to applications
Alphabetic grading

5.12.5.6 Comparison with traditional methodologies

Comparison with traditional methodologies consisting of the following topics is found in the informative reference Annex I of ISO/IEC 15416: Traditional methodologies

Correlation of print contrast signal with symbol contrast measurements
Guidance on grading for applications also specifying print contrast signal (PCS)

5.12.5.7 Process control requirements

Process control requirement methodologies consisting of the following topics are found in the informative reference Annex J of ISO/IEC 15416: Process control for repetitive printing

Number of scans
Bar width deviation
Two-width symbologies
(n,k) symbologies
Average bar gain/loss
Average bar error is not graded directly, but is used to calculate what fraction of a defined bar tolerance is consumed by the printing process. This traditional bar tolerance calculation differs by symbology and, in the case of the EAN/UPC symbology, it also differs by the X-dimension at which the symbol is printed. Generally, a smaller X-dimension yields a smaller tolerance.

5.12.5.8 Compliance statement

Verifiers that are suitable for use with the recommendations contained in these GS1 General Specifications will typically be supplied with a statement that associates the instrument with a calibration conformance test card.

5.12.5.9 Calibrated conformance standard test cards

The verifier operator may use a variety of tools and procedures to periodically ensure maintenance of the verifier's calibration. For example, the operator may follow the manufacturer’s recommended procedure for set-up, programming (if necessary), normal operational calibration and use of the verifier prior to performing any tests. Indeed such procedures are considered essential to ensure the consistency of verification results over time.

Some verifier manufacturers may require the operator to utilise a calibration patch designed for use in maintaining instrument calibration. A common form of patch is often referred to as a "reflectance patch," which may be provided with the instrument. It is very important that the manufacturer's instructions are followed carefully and conscientiously to properly calibrate the instrument. An indication of "calibration complete" normally signals successful recalibration of the device. Other manufacturers may require periodic factory calibration of their verifier to maintain proper calibration.

With the increasing use of verifiers as communication tools, all verifiers must be periodically checked for their calibration conformance to a traceable standard (within accuracy and repeatability limits stated by the manufacturer). For this reason, Calibrated Conformance Standard Test Cards are available for the verifier user.

Calibrated conformance standard test cards have been designed for verifiers with 6, 8, 10 and 20 mils apertures and the following are currently available from your GS1 Member Organisation:

EAN/UPC Calibrated Conformance Standard Test Card.

ITF Calibrated Conformance Standard Test Card.
GS1-128 Calibrated Conformance Standard Test Card.
GS1 DataBar Calibrated Conformance Standard Test Card.
GS1 DataMatrix Calibrated Conformance Standard Test Card.
Use of these test cards provide a number of benefits including:

Validates verifiers for UPC-A, EAN-13, ITF, GS1-128, GS1 DataMatrix and GS1 DataBar symbols.

Covers all GS1 symbologies except Composite Component and GS1 QR Code.

Training tool for operators of verifiers.

Validates that the verifier is working within its specified tolerances for the symbology selected.
Each test card is designed to test particular characteristics of ISO/IEC 15416 and ISO/IEC 15415 based verification equipment. The standards are manufactured on special materials and are made traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). The idea behind the standard is to regularly test the verification equipment to ensure it is operating within ISO tolerance levels as published by the verifier manufacturer. This is especially important in heavy use applications where various operators may be involved or where a new user is learning to properly verify. The operator should routinely scan each of the symbols on the test card to determine if the verifier device provides the values listed. These specifications stipulate an aperture and 660 nanometres +/-10 nanometres wavelength be used, and the exact scanning method should be determined by following all of the verifier manufacturer recommendations. This may require some practice to obtain the right touch, but it will inform the operator when the correct method has been used.

If the verifier reports values that agree with the values listed on the test card (within the verifier manufacturer’s stated accuracy and repeatability limits), then the operator can assume the verifier is calibrated. If, after repeated attempts, the device does not provide the value as printed on the standard (within the verifier manufacturer’s stated accuracy and repeatability limits), then the device or the operator’s scanning technique must be considered suspect. In this event, the operator should refer to his or her operator’s manual as to the proper remedies specified by the verifier manufacturer.

Test cards are sensitive and should be handled with care. If the symbols show dirty areas, one can safely clean these by using a soft cotton pad and photographic grade film cleaner. If visible scratches develop on a symbol, that area of the symbol SHALL NOT be used. If sufficient visible scratches develop so that a clean scan path is not available, then the test card is no longer useable and SHALL be replaced.

The test card serves as a device for, or means of, confirming that an ISO-based verifier has been properly calibrated and that users are obtaining results within the accuracy limits stated by the manufacturer of their instruments.

It is possible that a defective verifier, use of a damaged or incorrect reflectance patch, or, in some cases, a careless user performing the calibration to the patch might provide a false indication of successful calibration. The proper use of the Calibrated Conformance Standard Test Cards is the only way multiple trading partners can be assured of reliable quality measurements for the printed GS1 endorsed symbol.

As a general rule, any ISO-based verifier (NIST or non-NIST traceable) should be periodically tested using a Calibrated Conformance Standard Test Card. This procedure will confirm both the accuracy of the instrument and the skill of the user.

5.12.5.10 Special considerations for verification of GS1 system symbologies 5.12.5.10.1 General Since ISO verification does not measure dimensions, it is part of the additional visual checking that has to be carried out to ensure that, for example, the symbol height meets the application requirements.

With better digital imaging software, element dimensions can only be adjusted automatically to the nearest integer number of pixels in the output device, be it imagesetter or printer, enabling element width ratios to be maintained with allowance duly made, for example, for bar gain/loss and adjustment of element widths for digits 1, 2, 7 and 8 in EAN/UPC symbols. This means that symbol sizes may not match those input as target dimensions, but will vary in discrete steps within the permitted range, which will result in a more accurate symbol overall.

Note: For a list of international standards pertaining to GS1 system symbologies, see section 5.1.2 5.12.5.10.2 Acceptance criteria The acceptance criteria are intended to confirm that symbols adhere to all the requirements in the symbol specification tables with an allowance for a small measurement variation between commercial verifiers or operators:

X-dimension is to have an Acceptance Criteria of 2% (-2% on the minimum specified X-dimension

and +2% on the maximum specified X-dimension).

The measurements for height and each Quiet Zone have an Acceptance Criteria of 5% (-5% on

the minimum specified dimension and +5% on the maximum specified dimension).

5.12.5.10.3 EAN/UPC symbology The main characteristic of the EAN/UPC symbology that affects verification is the different treatment of the three sets of symbol characters for digits 1, 2, 7 and 8 from the remaining digits (0, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 9). The reference decode algorithm uses the combined width of both bars in these characters to discriminate between a 1 and a 7, and between a 2 and an 8, which are ambiguously decodable since they share the same set of edge-to-similar-edge modular dimensions. The addition to or subtraction from the element widths of 1/13 module is intended to increase the differences between the sums of the bar widths for each pair of ambiguous characters. The decodability parameter for these characters takes account of bar gain and loss whereas it does not for the remaining symbol characters. Consequently, a symbol not containing any of these four symbol characters may suffer substantial bar gain or loss without degrading its decodability, whereas a symbol that does contain one or more of them is likely to have a lower decodability grade, with the same amount of bar gain or loss. However, the laws of probability suggest that only some 6.9 percent of symbols would not be affected by this, so it is wise to be cautious and assume that bar gain or loss is a possible cause of a poor decodability grade for EAN/UPC symbols. It is also wise (for process control purposes) not to assume that the decodability grade correlates with bar width deviation, but it is far safer and easier to rely on the traditional measurement of bar width deviation for adjusting the production process.

The measuring aperture for EAN/UPC symbols is either 6 or 10 mils, depending on the application, as specified by the symbol specification tables. Additional EAN/UPC symbol grading criteria ISO/IEC 15416 Bar code print quality test specification - Linear symbols allows for additional pass/fail criteria to be stipulated by a symbology specification. For the EAN/UPC symbology, the minimum Quiet Zone dimensions are given in 5.2.3.4. Any individual scan profile which does not meet these requirements allowing for the following tolerances SHALL receive a grade of "0".

Table 5-63 Minimum width of measured Quiet Zones

Symbol version	Left Quiet Zone	Right Quiet Zone
EAN-13	10X	6.2X
EAN-8	6.2X	6.2X
UPC-A	8X	8X
UPC-E	8X	6.2X
Add-ons (EAN)	EAN 13/8 right QZ	4.2X
Add-ons (U.P.C.)	UPC A/E right QZ	4.2X

Symbols that fall below range defined in 5.2.6.7 SHALL receive a grade of 0 (see 5.12.6.3 for exception). Note: The choice of minimum Quiet Zone dimension was based on the historical U.P.C.

Quality Guideline. Since EAN-13 and EAN-8 were not included, minimum Quiet Zone dimension similarly derived were chosen for those symbols. 5.12.5.10.4 GS1-128 symbology The important aspects to verify for a GS1-128 symbol are its print quality, which is assessed in the standard way, and its formatting, which may need to be visually checked from the information output by the verifier. The Code 128 symbology is an edge-to-similar- edge decodable symbology, but its reference decode algorithm also requires a check of the sum of the widths of the three bars in each character as part of its parity checking process. Consequently, its decodability is affected by bar gain or loss.

Measuring apertures for GS1-128 symbols are 6 or 10 mils depending on the application and are specified in the symbol specification tables. Data contained in GS1-128 symbols must be formatted according to these specifications for the use of GS1 Application Identifiers (AIs). Specific features to check are:

Presence of Function 1 Symbol Character (FNC1) as a flag for the GS1 system subset of the

Code 128 symbol, in the first position after the start character.

Use of FNC1 or the control character (ASCII value 29 (decimal), 1D (hexadecimal)) as a

separator character following non-predefined length element strings.

Sequencing of AIs, with predefined length AIs preceding non-predefined length ones.

Length of data fields with fixed length AIs.
Correct formatting of data in all AI fields.
Absence of encoded parentheses around AIs.
The extent to which a verifier can do this automatically will vary greatly among devices, even
those that have GS1-128 symbols as a specific symbology option.

5.12.5.10.5 ITF-14 symbology ITF-14 barcodes are, unlike the others used in the GS1 system, two-width (narrow/wide) symbols that cannot be decoded by the edge-to-similar-edge technique, but all element widths must be measured.

They are, therefore, more subject to the problems caused by bar gain or loss. The standard ISO verification technique is fully applicable to these symbols. However, in the GS1 system application, additional checks must be made to ensure that the X-dimension is within the permitted range.

Measuring apertures for the ITF-14 symbol SHALL be 10 mils for symbols with an X-dimension less than 0.635 millimetre (0.0250 in) and SHALL be 20 mils for symbols with an X-dimension equal to or greater than 0.635 millimetre (0.0250 in).

The minimum acceptable grade for symbols printed with the higher range of X-dimension (above 0.635 millimetre or 0.0250 in) SHALL be 0.5/20/660. This is because the brown corrugated substrates on which such symbols are often printed typically have a reflectance value below 40 percent, and sometimes below 30 percent, and cannot, therefore, ever achieve a symbol contrast better than 40 percent (the lower threshold for a grade 2 symbol contrast) no matter how dense the ink or how well the other attributes of the symbol are graded. As a result, the Scan Reflectance Profile (SRP) grade will most often be dictated by symbol contrast, so it cannot be higher than 1 for symbols on these materials, giving a maximum achievable overall symbol grade of 1.0.

Such symbols may also be affected by the inherent interference in the background reflectance caused by the substrate's composition, which may well lead to reduced defect grades and possibly low edge contrast and modulation values. It is, therefore, desirable to ensure that symbols printed on these corrugated materials are of as high a quality as possible in respect of the other parameters.

5.12.5.10.6 GS1 DataMatrix Determining symbol quality for items marked with GS1 DataMatrix (both traditionally printed and direct part marked - DPM) involves a specialised approach due to the physical nature of the marking and the optical systems used to read those symbols. The minimum symbol quality grade for GS1 DataMatrix symbols SHALL be specified by the application specification. The measurement of the quality parameters for DPM symbols SHALL be made by a verifier conforming to ISO/IEC 15415 and when direct marked augmented with ISO/IEC TR 29158 which defines DPM quality specific alternative illumination conditions, terms, parameters, modifications to the measurement and grading of certain parameters and the reporting of the grading results. According to these standards an overall grade is shown in the form:

Grade/Aperture/Light/Angle Where: "Grade" is the overall symbol grade as defined in ISO/IEC 15415 Information technology -

Automatic identification and data capture techniques - Bar code print quality test specification Two-dimensional symbols (e.g., the arithmetic mean to one decimal place of the Scan Reflectance Profile or scan grades) with the additional information found in ISO/IEC 29158 Information technology; Automatic identification and data capture techniques; direct part mark (DPM) Quality Guideline. For GS1 DataMatrix, the grade number may be followed by an asterisk, *, which indicates that the surroundings of the symbol contain extremes of reflectance that may interfere with reading. For most applications, this should be specified as causing the symbol to fail.

"Aperture" is the diameter in thousandths of an inch (to the nearest thousandth) of the

synthetic aperture defined in ISO/IEC 15415 Information technology - Automatic identification and data capture techniques - Bar code symbol print quality test specification - Two-dimensional symbols. "Light" defines the illumination: A numeric value indicates the peak light wavelength in
nanometres (for narrow band illumination); the alphabetic character W indicates that the symbol has been measured with broadband illumination ("white light"), the spectral response characteristics of which must imperatively be defined or have their source specification clearly referenced.

"Angle" is an additional parameter defining the angle of incidence (relative to the plane of the

symbol) of the illumination. It SHALL be included in the reporting of the overall symbol grade when the angle of incidence is other than 45 degrees. Its absence indicates that the angle of incidence is 45 degrees. Note: This international standard provides for 30 degrees and 90 degrees illumination in addition to the default 45 degrees.

The aperture is normally specified as being 80 percent of the minimum X-dimension allowed for the application. The printing method must produce the GS1 DataMatrix "L" pattern with gaps between the dots less than 25 percent of the specified aperture. If symbols with greater than the minimum X dimension are allowed by the application, the same absolute maximum gap dimension must be maintained.

5.12.5.10.7 GS1 QR Code Determining symbol quality for items marked with GS1 QR Code symbols involves a specialised approach due to the physical nature of the marking and the optical systems used to read those marks. The minimum symbol quality grade for GS1 QR Code symbols SHALL be specified by the application specification. The overall grade is shown in the form minimum grade/aperture/measuring wavelength.

Grade/Aperture/Light/Angle Where: "Grade" is the overall symbol grade as defined in ISO/IEC 15415 Information technology -

Automatic identification and data capture techniques - Bar code print quality test specification Two-dimensional symbols (e.g., the arithmetic mean to one decimal place of the Scan Reflectance Profile or scan grades). For GS1 QR Code, the grade number may be followed by an asterisk, *, which indicates that the surroundings of the symbol contain extremes of reflectance that may interfere with reading. For most applications, this should be specified as causing the symbol to fail.

"Aperture" is the diameter in thousandths of an inch (to the nearest thousandth) of the

synthetic aperture defined in ISO/IEC 15415 Information technology - Automatic identification and data capture techniques - Bar code symbol print quality test specification - Two-dimensional symbols. "Light" defines the illumination: A numeric value indicates the peak light wavelength in
nanometres (for narrow band illumination); the alphabetic character W indicates that the symbol has been measured with broadband illumination ("white light"), the spectral response characteristics of which must imperatively be defined or have their source specification clearly referenced.

"Angle" is an additional parameter defining the angle of incidence (relative to the plane of the

symbol) of the illumination. It SHALL be included in the reporting of the overall symbol grade when the angle of incidence is other than 45 degrees. Its absence indicates that the angle of incidence is 45 degrees. The aperture is normally specified as being 80 percent of the minimum X-dimension allowed for the application.

5.12.5.10.8 GS1 DotCode The minimum symbol quality grade for GS1 DotCode symbols SHALL be specified by the application specification. The overall grade is shown in the form minimum grade/aperture/measuring wavelength/angle.

Grade/Aperture/Light/Angle Where: "Grade" is the overall symbol grade as defined in ISO/IEC 15415 Information technology -

Automatic identification and data capture techniques - Bar code print quality test specification Two-dimensional symbols. For GS1 DotCode, the grade number may be followed by an asterisk, *, which indicates that the surroundings of the symbol contain extremes of reflectance that may interfere with reading. For most applications, this should be specified as causing the symbol to fail.

"Aperture" is the diameter in thousandths of an inch (to the nearest thousandth) of the

synthetic aperture defined in ISO/IEC 15415 Information technology - Automatic identification and data capture techniques - Bar code symbol print quality test specification - Two-dimensional symbols. "Light" defines the illumination: A numeric value indicates the peak light wavelength in
nanometres (for narrow band illumination); the alphabetic character W indicates that the symbol has been measured with broadband illumination ("white light"), the spectral response characteristics of which must imperatively be defined or have their source specification clearly referenced.

"Angle" is an additional parameter defining the angle of incidence (relative to the plane of the symbol) of the illumination. It SHALL be included in the reporting of the overall symbol grade when the angle of incidence is other than 45 degrees. Its absence indicates that the angle of incidence is 45 degrees.

5.12.5.11 Possible causes of less-than-perfect verification grades 5.12.5.11.1 Reflectance parameters Symbol contrast is governed by the reflectance of the substrate and ink. A symbol printed in black ink on a white paper will almost certainly achieve the top grade 4 for symbol contrast, as white papers typically have reflectance in excess of 75 percent, and black ink will usually have about 3 to 8 percent reflectance. Coloured backgrounds or coloured inks will affect the result. Highly glossy materials may also appear to have a lower background reflectance than expected. The worst case may be when printing on a corrugated brown fibreboard material, which may have a reflectance in a range between 27 and 40 percent, so even with a very dense, low reflectance ink it can never achieve better than the minimum passing grade 1 for symbol contrast (grade 1 includes symbol contrast values from 20 to 39 percent).

The causes of low symbol contrast and the solutions are: Background too dark: Use lighter or less glossy material, or change background colour (if

printed) to one with higher reflectance.

Bars too light: Change bar colour for one with lower reflectance, and increase ink weight or print

head temperature (thermal printing) (Watch for consequential increase in bar widths).

Show-through of contents: Use more opaque material for package, or print opaque white

underlay prior to printing symbol.

Show-through of imprint: Use more opaque labels.

Minimum reflectance, or Rmin, must always be equal to or less than half the highest reflectance value, Rmax. In practice, this means that the reflectance of at least one bar must meet this criterion. For example, if Rmax is 70 percent, at least one bar must have a reflectance of 35 percent or less. A symbol that fails on this parameter will almost certainly have a low symbol contrast grade also. The cause of and solution for Rmin being too high include:

Bars too light: Change bar colour to one with lower reflectance, and increase ink weight or print

head temperature (thermal printing) (Watch for consequential increase in bar widths).

Minimum Edge Contrast (ECmin) will always be lower than symbol contrast, but will only be a problem in itself if it approaches or drops below 15 percent (the pass/fail threshold). However, low edge contrast (EC) values, acceptable under this criterion, may still cause low modulation (MOD) grades. The causes of a low value of ECmin and the possible remedies are:

Local variations in background reflectance (e.g., fragments of darker material in a recycled

material): Use a more consistent substrate or one with higher reflectance.

Local variations in inking of the bars: Adjust press settings to ensure even inking.

Show-through of contents: Use more opaque material for package, or print opaque white
underlay prior to printing symbol.

Elements adjoining the edge in question are excessively narrow relative to the measuring

aperture used: Increase X-dimension; ensure correct measuring aperture is used; ensure correct bar width adjustment (BWA) applied to film master/original symbol; print bars marginally narrower than spaces of same modular dimension. Modulation, being calculated as the percentage of symbol contrast represented by the ECmin, will be reduced for the same reasons as when ECmin is low in the symbol. A scanner will tend to see spaces as narrower than bars and also to see narrow elements as less distinct than wider ones.

Consequently, if there is significant bar loss, modulation will be reduced. Measuring with an aperture that is too large for the X-dimension will also reduce modulation. The causes of a low value of modulation (often listed as “MOD” on verification reports) and the possible remedies are:

Local variations in background reflectance (e.g., fragments of darker material in a recycled

material): Use a more consistent substrate or one with higher reflectance.

Local variations in inking of the bars: Adjust press settings to ensure even or darker inking.

Show-through of contents: Use more opaque material for package, or print opaque white
underlay prior to printing symbol.

Element(s) adjoining the edge in question appear excessively narrow relative to the measuring

aperture used: Increase X-dimension; ensure correct measuring aperture is used; apply correct

BWA when originating symbol; print bars marginally narrower than spaces of same modular dimension. 5.12.5.12 Other parameters Decode is graded on a pass/fail basis by applying the reference decode algorithm to the edge positions and element widths determined for the symbol. A failure to decode may be evidence of the symbol being incorrectly encoded, which may include an incorrect check digit. It also may indicate either that the bars and spaces initially identified by the global threshold are too many or too few for a valid symbol or that one or more edge positions are ambiguous. The possible causes of decode failure and possible remedies are:

Symbol incorrectly encoded: Re-originate symbol; over-label with correctly encoded symbol.

Check digit incorrectly calculated: Correct software error in origination system; re-originate
symbol; over-label with correctly calculated symbol.

Gross element width errors due to excessive bar gain or loss, or to defects: Apply correct bar

width adjustment (BWA) when originating symbol; adjust press or printer settings.

Too many elements detected due to defects: Correct cause of defects; adjust press (relief

printing processes) to reduce haloing; replace print head (thermal/ink-jet printing).

Too few elements detected (failure to cross global threshold): Refer to solutions for edge

contrast (EC).

In the ISO standard, a decode failure occurs because an incorrect number of elements has been perceived to be present, either because the profile of one or more elements has failed to cross the global threshold or because a gross defect has caused one element to be seen as three or more, corresponding to the separately graded Edge Determination failure in the ANSI standard, which may also be reported by some verifiers following the ANSI methodology.

Figure 5-71 shows a symbol in which the narrow spaces have been partly filled in, reducing their contrast below the global threshold and causing an edge determination or decode failure. This could also be interpreted as an extreme example of modulation (MOD).

Figure 5-71 Symbol with edge determination problem

Figure 5-72 illustrates a Scan Reflectance Profile (SRP) showing narrow space profiles failing to reach the global threshold, giving an (ISO) decode failure or (ANSI) edge determination failure.

Figure 5-72 Scan Reflectance Profile with narrow space profiles

Decodability grades are influenced by bar gain or loss in most symbologies and by distortion of the symbol. Distortion can occur with relief printing processes, such as flexography, when the printing plate is stretched around the press cylinder with the bars parallel to the cylinder axis (e.g., at right angles to the print direction). A common reason for distortion with digitally-originated images is that they have been rescaled in graphics software, resulting in uneven addition or removal of pixels to or from the element widths. Print processes that tend to produce irregular bar edges, such as ink-jet and photogravure, will also be likely to give lower decodability grades. The causes of a low value of decodability and the possible remedies are:

Bar gain/loss (systematic): Apply correct bar width adjustment (BWA) when originating symbol;

adjust press settings.

Element width gain/loss (non-systematic): Correct missing pixels (burnt-out print head

elements, blocked ink-jet nozzles); rectify cause of defects.

Distortion of symbol (uneven stretching of flexographic plate; non-linear disproportioning in

plate-making process): Print symbol with height of bars parallel to direction of printing; do not disproportion barcode image in plate-making. Rescaling of digitally-originated images: Ensure symbol is created in correct size; ensure
software matches module widths to integer number of pixels after all adjustments.

Irregular element edges (ink-jet, photogravure, screen process printing): Change print

technology; increase X-dimension; re-orient symbol relative to cylinder engraving angle/screen mesh. The symbol in Figure 5-73 is taken from the GS1 Calibrated Conformance Standard Test Card and has an engineered low decodability grade of 50 percent. As may be determined from the accompanying Scan Reflectance Profile (SRP), just to the left of halfway across the symbol, the width of a two-module bar has been increased in the sixth digit (and since the character is a 1, its decodability is affected by bar width). Although the original symbol has a very consistent image density, the profile also shows the effect of modulation (MOD), most noticeably on the narrow spaces.

Figure 5-73 Calibration symbol with engineered low decodability grade

Figure 5-74 Scan Reflectance Profile of symbol with low decodability character

Defects, which show as irregularities in the Scan Reflectance Profile, may be caused by spots of extraneous ink in Quiet Zones or in the spaces. Small voids (white areas) in the bars are also highlighted as defects. In symbols printed on recycled or some other materials, local variations in reflectance of the background will also show as defects. The significance of a defect is in direct relation to the depth of the irregularity it causes in the Scan Reflectance Profile. Common causes and the most likely solutions include:

Defective print head elements (thermal printing or ink-jet printing), which will tend to produce

an unprinted line running through the symbol in the direction of printing: Clean or replace print head. Satellite (ink droplets in the white are surrounding the printed bars): Clean head; change ink
formulation.

Haloing (e.g., a double line impression where there should only be a single line impression):

Adjust impression pressure and/or ink viscosity.

Incorrect matching of thermal transfer ribbons and substrate (poor adhesion of ink to surface):

Use correct ribbon for substrate; use smoother substrate.

Measuring aperture too small: Use verifier with correct aperture.

The use of a smaller or larger measuring aperture than specified for the symbol will produce misleading defect grades and this is perhaps the strongest argument for ensuring that the right aperture size is used. Too small an aperture will exaggerate the apparent size of a defect; too large an aperture will tend to smooth it out.

Quiet Zones are a frequent source of scanning problems. Although the ISO standard does not directly require measurement of the Quiet Zones, it requires any additional requirements specified by the application specification to be graded on a pass/fail basis. These GS1 General Specifications establish Quiet Zone requirements for all symbols used in the GS1 system and a Quiet Zone less than the minimum width will, therefore, cause the profile grade to fail. Possible causes of Quiet Zone failure and the remedies are:

Printed box surrounding symbol or other interfering print: Enlarge box; ensure symbol

registration to other print allows adequate margins; use Quiet Zone Indicators if possible.

Symbol too close to label edge: Adjust label feed; reposition symbol farther from edge; use

larger label size or smaller symbol.

5.12.6 Print process characterisation techniques

5.12.6.1 Introduction

This section specifies when EAN/UPC symbols can be printed at less than the current minimum specification of 0.264 millimetres or 0.0104 inch X-dimension (80 percent magnification).

5.12.6.2 Background

Many printer users have asked if the magnifications in the 75 to 80 percent range for EAN/UPC symbols printed by thermal and laser on-demand printers are acceptable for use. The most common printing densities used by on-demand, barcode printers are 200 and 300 dpi. However, due to the constraints of the dot pitch, these printers cannot print an 80 percent symbol correctly. The nearest to 80 percent that these printers can print is 75.7 or 76.9 percent depending on the exact dot geometry.

Even though 80 percent magnification is the minimum value specified in the EAN/UPC symbol specification, users of on-demand printers have used magnifications between 75 and 80 percent in point-of-sale scanning environments for years. They have done so with no significant reduction in scan rate, as compared to symbols printed precisely at 80 percent. Because larger in-specification EAN/UPC symbols are always easier to scan, 80 percent symbols and larger are preferred. However, when an on-demand printer is required, the 75 to 80 percent EAN/UPC symbols are an acceptable alternative given the conditions in section 5.12.6.3.

5.12.6.3 New qualifications for printing

The allowance for EAN/UPC symbol magnifications from 75 to 80 percent is only applicable to "on demand" (e.g., thermal or laser) print processes. For all other printing processes, 80 percent is attainable and is the minimum allowable size.

When printing a minimum symbol with any method of printing, the area provided for printing the symbol and the required Quiet Zone SHOULD never be less than the area required for an 80 percent symbol. This area is derived from the total width of an 80 percent symbol times its height as shown in the dimensions in the figure below.

When printing a minimum symbol with any method of printing, the symbol height SHOULD never be truncated below the 80 percent value (20.7 millimetres or 0.816 inch). The minimum print quality grade SHOULD be the same for all EAN/UPC symbols; at least an ISO/ANSI grade of 1.5 (or C). It is advisable to print EAN/UPC symbols that are at least a 2.5 (B) grade at the time of printing regardless of size.

Figure 5-75 EAN/UPC symbol shown with minimum height and overall width dimensions for magnifications of 75 percent to 80 percent Note: As you move from 80 to 75 percent magnification, the Quiet Zone increases from 0.094 inch (2.38 millimetres) to 0.124 inch (3.16 millimetres) in order to keep the overall width constant at 1.175 inches (29.85 millimetres).

5.12.6.4 Summary

When printing with on-demand printers (e.g., thermal or laser) the resulting element widths for EAN/UPC symbols SHALL NOT be less than 75 percent magnification. If the symbol printed with element widths is less than 80 percent, then the overall symbol SHALL have both larger Quiet Zones and taller bars such that the resulting area is not less than that of 80 percent magnification symbols. The symbol print quality must still meet the EAN/UPC symbol requirements of 1.5/06/660.

5.12.7 GS1 barcode verification template

5.12.7.1 Introduction

These GS1 barcode verification templates were developed in co-operation with retailers, manufacturers, logistic providers and equipment providers to ensure a common reporting approach on a global level. They help to ensure consistency regardless of where and by whom the barcodes are tested thus removing the costly and inefficient requirements for multiple testing of identical barcodes and reducing the cost of compliant equipment.

These templates do not introduce any requirements in and of themselves. The aim is to provide a common reporting format to measure compliance with the numbering and barcoding standards as well as HRI rules of GS1 laid down elsewhere in these GS1 General Specifications.

5.12.7.2 Background

GS1 has developed these verification templates on the basis of ISO/IEC 15416 Information technology – Automatic identification and data capture techniques, Bar Code Print Quality Test Specifications for Linear Symbols and ISO/IEC 15415 Information technology – Automatic identification and data capture techniques – Bar code print quality test specification – Two dimensional symbols. These templates allow for reporting the quality of printed barcodes but also checks against other key aspects of GS1 system (barcode placement, fit-for purposes, data integrity, etc.).

Note: The acceptance criteria are intended to ensure that barcodes adhere to all the requirements in the GS1 SSTs with an allowance for a small measurement variation. A GS1 initiated Verifier Conformance Testing Project was conducted because of concerns expressed that different verifiers or verification services were unable to perform consistently. The perception was that different verifiers gave substantially different results when measuring the same barcode. A precisely defined test programme was performed under the auspices of GS1 and concluded that:

All verifiers tested (each one ISO compliant) demonstrated the capability of consistent

performance.

Operators of verifiers require proper training and instruments require regular calibration in

accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

Most verifiers tested were capable of conforming to GS1 requirements.

It is therefore important to stress the need for professional verification services and that barcode print quality should be integral part of an overall quality programme. Section 5.12.3 provides a quick reference list of barcode quality specifications depending on the barcode type, the application, the syntax, printing method (e.g. direct printing) and the identification number .

All GS1 user companies should perform quality control of barcode production and most GS1 Member Organisations offer a verification service. These report templates may be used by any organisation or company as part of a quality programme while respecting the Copyright of the GS1 logo (or any heading or text that imply actual GS1 endorsement (subject to local licensing agreements such as accreditation programmes, which may allow exceptions)).

The two templates below highlight critical issues relating to verification and provide a common template for reporting on the most common areas of application. Note that an image of the barcode generated by the verifier is often provided along with the template information.

5.12.7.3 GS1 barcode verification template for linear barcodes

Example template: Issue date: Product Description: Type of barcode: Print method:

Number of barcodes on product: Verifier device: <Type/model> Verification software version: Last verifier calibration date: Please Note:

These assessments are based on meeting the minimum GS1 standards. To ensure efficient scanning, the barcode should exceed the minimum.

Testing summary of the linear barcode

GS1 General Specifications for linear barcodes tested environments: PASS or FAIL when verified in accordance with GS1 symbol specification table ________ Note: Provide symbol specification table name and table number used from the GS1 General Specifications. If barcode is tested against more than one symbol specification table, one report should be provided for each table.

Complies with GS1 barcode placement rules	Does/Does not comply with specification (& comment on business critical issue)
If multiple retail barcodes are present: Is the GS1 compliant two-dimensional barcode within a 50 mm radius from the centre of the linear POS barcode? (informative only)	Yes/No
ISO/IEC 15416 print quality grade

Decoded text Business critical comments

Technical analysis of the linear barcode

GS1 parameters	Comment	reference	Assessed	Within standard	range	Required	ISO/IEC parameters	Comment	Reference	ISO/IEC grade	4.0 to 0.0	Within standard	range	Required
Barcode structure	Overall ISO/IEC
grade
X-dimension (magnification)	Decode
Barcode height	Symbol contrast
Quiet Zone (left)	Minimum
reflectance
Quiet Zone (right)	Edge contrast
Human readable	Modulation
Barcode width	Defects
Validity of GS1 Company Prefix	Decodability
Data structure1 (syntax)
Print growth (+/- %) – Process control parameter
Educational comments2

(1) Data structure (syntax) indicates that the barcode is compliant with GS1 data syntax rules defined in the General Specifications. (2) Educational comments are based on the technical analysis of the barcode. In this comment box the operator comments on what the problem is and how to make the symbol better.

Notes (informative localised) Notes (informative localised) It is the responsibility of the GS1 identification licensee to ensure the This Verification Report may contain privileged and confidential correct use of the GS1 Company Prefix and/or the individually licensed information intended only for the use of the addressee named above. If keys and the correct allocation of the data content.

you are not the intended recipient of this report you are hereby notified that any use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this message Rejection of products should not necessarily be based only on an out is prohibited. If you received this message in error please notify of specification results [TESTING AGENCY].

Barcode verifiers are measuring devices and are tools that can be Disclaimer (legal localised) used for assisting in quality control. The results are not absolute in that they do not necessarily prove or disprove that the barcode will This report does not constitute evidence for the purpose of any scan.

litigation, and [TESTING AGENCY] will not enter into any discussion, or This report may not be amended after issue. In the event of a dispute respond to any correspondence in relation to litigation.

over contents the version held at [TESTING AGENCY] will be deemed Every possible effort has been made to ensure that the information and to be the correct and original version of this report.

specifications in the Barcode Verification Reports are correct, however, [TESTING AGENCY] expressly disclaims liability for any errors.

5.12.7.4 GS1 barcode verification template for two-dimensional barcodes

Example template: Issue date: Product Description: Type of barcode: Print method:

Number of barcodes on product: Verifier device <Type/model> Verification software version: Last verifier calibration date: Please Note:

These assessments are based on meeting the minimum GS1 standards. To ensure efficient scanning, the barcode should exceed the minimum.

Testing summary of the two-dimensional barcode

GS1 General Specifications for two-dimensional barcodes, environments tested: PASS or FAIL when verified in accordance with GS1 symbol specification table ________ Note: Provide symbol specification table name and number used from the GS1 General Specifications. If barcode is tested against more than one symbol specification table, one report should be provided for each table.

Complies to GS1 barcode placement recommendations	In/out spec (& comment on business critical issue)
If multiple retail barcodes are present: Is the GS1 compliant two-dimensional barcode within a 50 mm radius from the centre of the linear POS barcode? (informative only)	Yes/No
Overall ISO/IEC 15415 print quality grade

Decoded text Business critical comments

Technical analysis of the two-dimensional barcode

GS1 parameters	Comment	reference
Matrix size	NN X	Overall ISO/IEC grade
NN
X-dimension	mm	Decode
(inch)
Data structure1 (syntax)	Dependent	Symbol contrast
on
structure
encoded
Validity of GS1 Company Prefix	Modulation
Human readable	Axial nonuniformity
Grid nonuniformity
Unused Error Correction
Print growth
(horizontal)
Print growth (vertical)
Fixed pattern damage
• Clock track and solid
area regularity3
• Quite Zones (QZL1,
QZL2)3
• L1 and L23
• Format information4
• Version information4
Educational comments2:
(1) Data structure (syntax) indicates that the barcode is compliant with GS1 data syntax rules defined in the GS1 General Specifications or GS1 Digital Link URI Syntax standard. (2) Educational comments are based on the technical analysis of the barcode. In this comment box the operator comments on what the problem is and how to make the barcode better by explaining the parameter’s meanings. (3) Data Matrix Only, see ISO/IEC 16022 (4) QR Code Only, see ISO/IEC 18004

Notes (informative localised) Important Note (normative localised) It is the responsibility of the GS1 identification licensee to ensure This Verification Report may contain privileged and confidential information the correct use of the GS1 Company Prefix and/or the individually intended only for the use of the addressee named above. If you are not the licensed keys the correct allocation of the data content.

intended recipient of this report you are hereby notified that any use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this message is prohibited. If you received this message in error please notify [TESTING AGENCY].

Rejection of products should not necessarily be based only on an Disclaimer (legal localised) out of specification results This report does not constitute evidence for the purpose of any litigation, and [TESTING AGENCY] will not enter into any discussion, or respond to Barcode verifiers are measuring devices and are tools that can be any correspondence in relation to litigation.

used for assisting in quality control. The results are not absolute in that they do not necessarily prove or disprove that the barcode will scan. Every possible effort has been made to ensure that the information and specifications in the Barcode Verification Reports are correct, however, [TESTING AGENCY] expressly disclaims liability for any errors.

This report may not be amended after issue. In the event of a dispute over contents the version held at [TESTING AGENCY] will be deemed to be the correct and original version of this report.

5.13 UHF and HF EPC/RFID

Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) is an acronym that covers many different technologies, all of which have the following two points in common: Data and all other additional protocol information are stored (in a binary format) in a

microelectronic chip

RFID tags communicate with dedicated readers by means of radio frequency waves or fields

These technologies classified by these main features:

Passive or active

The operating frequency band
Batteryless or battery powered tags
It is worth noting that the choice of one of the available RFID technologies is globally independent from the data and identifiers that the RFID tags carry. EPC/RFID is a subset of RFID technologies that are used within the GS1 system. There are two types of EPC/RFID data carriers optimised for different application requirements. Both are passive technologies and are designed to carry Electronic Product Codes (EPC) formats including GS1 identification keys and Application Identifiers.

Note: EPC, Electronic Product Code, is designed to facilitate business processes and applications that need to manipulate visibility data – data about observations of physical objects. The EPC is a universal identifier that provides a unique identity for any physical object. The EPC is designed to be unique across all physical objects in the world, over all time and across all categories of physical objects. It is expressly intended for use by business applications that need to track all categories of physical objects, whatever they may be. There is a well-defined correspondence between EPCs and GS1 keys. This allows any physical object that is already identified by a GS1 key (or GS1 key + serial number combination) to be used in an EPC context where any category of physical object may be observed. Likewise, it allows EPC data captured in a broad visibility context to be correlated with other business data that is specific to the category of object involved and which uses GS1 keys. For more information, see: GS1 EPC Tag Data Standard (TDS).

The first type, UHF EPC/RFID, works in the UHF (Ultra High Frequency) bands and is defined in the “EPC Radio-Frequency Identity Protocols Generation-2 UHF RFID Standard, Specification for RFID Air Interface Protocol for Communications at 860 MHz – 960 MHz”. This standard has established itself as the backbone for UHF RFID implementations across multiple sectors.

The second type, HF EPC/RFID, works in the HF (High Frequency) band and is defined in the “EPC Radio-Frequency Identity Protocols EPC Class-1 HF RFID Air Interface Protocol for Communications at 13.56 MHz”.

Note: For reasons of simplicity, since UHF EPC/RFID is much more widely used than HF EPC/RFID, simple reference to EPC/RFID usually means UHF EPC/RFID. Note: Air interface protocol standard defines the way readers and tags make use of a dedicated frequency band of the radio spectrum to communicate. It also defines a set of standardised commands and responses.

For encoding and decoding procedures and technical specifications related to the management of EPC/RFID Tags memory banks, the GS1 General Specifications make normative reference to the GS1 EPC Tag Data Standard (TDS).

Complementing TDS and EPC/RFID Air Interface protocols, other GS1 standards related to the implementation and use of EPC/RFID can be found at: https://www.gs1.org/standards/epc-rfid

5.14 NFC

Near Field Communication (NFC) covers many different technologies, all of which have the following two points in common: Data and all other additional protocol information are stored (in a binary format) in a

microelectronic chip

NFC tags communicate with dedicated readers by means of inductive fields at 13.56 MHz

NFC Forum devices (readers and tags) are defined by NFC Forum Specifications (https://nfcforum.org/build/specifications). They represent a subset of NFC devices. Within the GS1 system, only NFC Forum devices can be used. Note: For reasons of simplicity, since NFC Forum-certified devices are the only ones that can be used within the GS1 system, simple reference to NFC device (tag or reader) in this document means NFC Forum device (tag or reader).

返回目录

上一篇：4 Application rules and management practices

下一篇：6 Barcode placement

原文链接：GS1 General Specifications Standard

Value of V	Number sets used for symbol characters
1	2	3	4	5
0	B	B	A	A	A
1	B	A	B	A	A
2	B	A	A	B	A
3	B	A	A	A	B
4	A	B	B	A	A
5	A	A	B	B	A
6	A	A	A	B	B
7	A	B	A	B	A
8	A	B	A	A	B
9	A	A	B	A	B

Value of V	Number sets used for symbol characters
1	2	3	4	5
0	B	B	A	A	A
1	B	A	B	A	A
2	B	A	A	B	A
3	B	A	A	A	B
4	A	B	B	A	A
5	A	A	B	B	A
6	A	A	A	B	B
7	A	B	A	B	A
8	A	B	A	A	B
9	A	A	B	A	B

5.1 Introduction​

5.1.1 Overview of GS1 barcodes​

5.1.2 International data carrier standards​

5.1.3 Symbology identifiers​

5.2 Linear barcodes - EAN/UPC symbology specifications​

5.2.1 Symbology characteristics​

5.2.1.1 Symbol types​

5.2.1.2 Symbol encodation​

5.2.1.2.1 Symbol character encodation​

5.2.1.2.2 Auxiliary pattern encodation​

5.2.2 Symbol formats​

5.2.2.1 EAN-13 barcodes​

5.2.2.2 EAN-8 barcodes​

5.2.2.3 UPC-A barcodes​

5.2.2.4 UPC-E barcodes​

5.2.2.4.1 Encodation of the UPC-E barcode​

5.2.2.4.2 Decoding a UPC-E barcode​

5.2.2.5 Add-on symbols​

5.2.2.5.1 Two-digit add-on symbol​

5.2.2.5.2 Five-digit add-on symbol​

5.2.3 Dimensions and tolerances​

5.2.3.1 Nominal dimensions of characters​

5.2.3.2 Symbol height​

5.2.3.3 X-dimension (magnification factor)​

5.2.3.4 Quiet Zone​

5.2.3.5 Symbol length​

5.2.3.6 Positioning of the add-on symbol​

5.2.4 Reference decode algorithm​

5.2.5 Human readable interpretation​

5.2.6 Additional features​

5.2.6.1 Character values in the EAN/UPC symbology family​

5.2.6.2 Auxiliary characters in the EAN/UPC symbology family​

5.2.6.3 Logical structure of an EAN-13 and UPC-A barcode excluding Quiet Zones​

5.2.6.4 Logical structure of an EAN-8 Barcode excluding Quiet Zones​

5.2.6.5 Logical structure of a UPC-E barcode excluding Quiet Zones​

5.2.6.6 Symbol dimensions at nominal size (X-dimension = 0.330 mm, not to scale)​

5.2.6.7 Dimensions of modules and symbols​

5.3 Linear barcodes - ITF-14 symbology specifications​

5.3.1 Symbology characteristics​

5.3.2 Symbol structure​

5.3.2.1 Character encodation​

5.3.2.1.1 Data character encodation​

5.3.2.1.2 Start and stop patterns​

5.3.2.1.3 Check digit​

5.3.2.2 Dimensions and tolerances​

5.3.2.3 Reference decode algorithm​

5.3.2.4 Bearer bars​

5.3.2.5 Human readable interpretation​

5.3.3 Additional features (informative)​

5.3.3.1 Protection against short scans​

5.3.3.2 Fixed length symbols​

5.3.4 Guidelines for the use of ITF-14 (informative)​

5.3.4.1 Autodiscrimination compatibility​

5.3.4.2 System considerations​

5.3.5 Symbology identifier (informative)​

5.3.6 Test specifications (informative)​

2.25 <N < 3.00​

5.4 Linear barcodes - GS1-128 symbology specifications​

5.4.1 GS1-128 symbology characteristics​

5.4.2 GS1-128 barcode structure​

5.4.3 GS1-128 symbology character assignments​

5.4.3.1 Symbol character structure​

5.4.3.2 Data character encodation​

5.4.3.3 Code sets​

5.4.3.3.1 Code set A​

5.4.3.3.2 Code set B​

5.4.3.3.3 Code set C​

5.4.3.4 Special characters​

5.4.3.4.1 Code set and shift characters​

5.4.3.4.2 Function characters​

5.4.3.5 Start and stop characters​

5.4.3.6 Symbol check character​

5.4.3.7 GS1-128 symbology start pattern​

5.4.3.8 Relationship of symbol character value to ASCII value (informative)​

5.4.4 Dimensional requirements​

5.4.4.1 Minimum width of a module (X-dimension)​

5.4.4.2 Quiet Zone​

5.4.4.3 Maximum symbol length​

5.4.5 Reference decode algorithm​

5.4.6 Symbol quality​

5.1 Introduction

5.1.1 Overview of GS1 barcodes

5.1.2 International data carrier standards

5.1.3 Symbology identifiers

5.2 Linear barcodes - EAN/UPC symbology specifications

5.2.1 Symbology characteristics

5.2.1.1 Symbol types

5.2.1.2 Symbol encodation

5.2.1.2.1 Symbol character encodation

5.2.1.2.2 Auxiliary pattern encodation

5.2.2 Symbol formats

5.2.2.1 EAN-13 barcodes

5.2.2.2 EAN-8 barcodes

5.2.2.3 UPC-A barcodes

5.2.2.4 UPC-E barcodes

5.2.2.4.1 Encodation of the UPC-E barcode

5.2.2.4.2 Decoding a UPC-E barcode

5.2.2.5 Add-on symbols

5.2.2.5.1 Two-digit add-on symbol

5.2.2.5.2 Five-digit add-on symbol

5.2.3 Dimensions and tolerances

5.2.3.1 Nominal dimensions of characters

5.2.3.2 Symbol height

5.2.3.3 X-dimension (magnification factor)

5.2.3.4 Quiet Zone

5.2.3.5 Symbol length

5.2.3.6 Positioning of the add-on symbol

5.2.4 Reference decode algorithm

5.2.5 Human readable interpretation

5.2.6 Additional features

5.2.6.1 Character values in the EAN/UPC symbology family

5.2.6.2 Auxiliary characters in the EAN/UPC symbology family

5.2.6.3 Logical structure of an EAN-13 and UPC-A barcode excluding Quiet Zones

5.2.6.4 Logical structure of an EAN-8 Barcode excluding Quiet Zones

5.2.6.5 Logical structure of a UPC-E barcode excluding Quiet Zones

5.2.6.6 Symbol dimensions at nominal size (X-dimension = 0.330 mm, not to scale)

5.2.6.7 Dimensions of modules and symbols

5.3 Linear barcodes - ITF-14 symbology specifications

5.3.1 Symbology characteristics

5.3.2 Symbol structure

5.3.2.1 Character encodation

5.3.2.1.1 Data character encodation

5.3.2.1.2 Start and stop patterns

5.3.2.1.3 Check digit

5.3.2.2 Dimensions and tolerances

5.3.2.3 Reference decode algorithm

5.3.2.4 Bearer bars

5.3.2.5 Human readable interpretation

5.3.3 Additional features (informative)

5.3.3.1 Protection against short scans

5.3.3.2 Fixed length symbols

5.3.4 Guidelines for the use of ITF-14 (informative)

5.3.4.1 Autodiscrimination compatibility

5.3.4.2 System considerations

5.3.5 Symbology identifier (informative)

5.3.6 Test specifications (informative)

2.25 <N < 3.00

5.4 Linear barcodes - GS1-128 symbology specifications

5.4.1 GS1-128 symbology characteristics

5.4.2 GS1-128 barcode structure

5.4.3 GS1-128 symbology character assignments

5.4.3.1 Symbol character structure

5.4.3.2 Data character encodation

5.4.3.3 Code sets

5.4.3.3.1 Code set A

5.4.3.3.2 Code set B

5.4.3.3.3 Code set C

5.4.3.4 Special characters

5.4.3.4.1 Code set and shift characters

5.4.3.4.2 Function characters

5.4.3.5 Start and stop characters

5.4.3.6 Symbol check character

5.4.3.7 GS1-128 symbology start pattern

5.4.3.8 Relationship of symbol character value to ASCII value (informative)

5.4.4 Dimensional requirements

5.4.4.1 Minimum width of a module (X-dimension)

5.4.4.2 Quiet Zone

5.4.4.3 Maximum symbol length

5.4.5 Reference decode algorithm

5.4.6 Symbol quality

Value of V	Number sets used for symbol characters
1	2	3	4	5
0	B	B	A	A	A
1	B	A	B	A	A
2	B	A	A	B	A
3	B	A	A	A	B
4	A	B	B	A	A
5	A	A	B	B	A
6	A	A	A	B	B
7	A	B	A	B	A
8	A	B	A	A	B
9	A	A	B	A	B